JP6540589B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is periodically alterable gaming machine the rate of incoming balls to detecting means from the connection channel (Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-70526 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement with regard to the attention of the gaming balls flowing into the connection flow path . The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the power of attention to gaming balls flowing into connection channels .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can detect the passage of the gaming ball in which the gaming ball is formed so as to be able to flow down and at least a part of the gaming ball which has flowed down the gaming region. A detection means, a connection flow path for connecting the game area and the detection means so that the game ball can flow down, and a switching means which can switch the flow path in which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path , the detecting device, the connecting channel to detect at least a passage of a portion of the game ball flowing down, a shall Let it gives a predetermined benefit to the player with the detecting the passage of the game ball, At least one is provided, and the switching means flows in later than the first gaming ball which is the gaming ball that flows first among the plurality of gaming balls flowing into the connection flow path within a predetermined period . 2/5 gaming ball passes through the predetermined said detecting means Switches the connection channel in Kusuru embodiment, the switching means is disposed upstream of the predetermined detecting means of the connecting channel, regulate the ball entrance to the predetermined detection means of the first game balls It is provided with an emission restricting means which can switch between the first possible state and the second state in which the second gaming ball can enter the predetermined detecting means, and the first ball restricts the first ball. that said the predetermined detection means, wherein the said predetermined detection means is allowed to enter the sphere second state, Ru same said detecting means der.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, comprising a substrate box .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the attention to the gaming balls flowing into the connection flow path .

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the substrate can be accommodated in the substrate box .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a delay device. It is sectional drawing of the delay device in the VII-VII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the delay device in the VIII-VIII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a slide movement member. (A) is a front view of a slide movement member, (b) is a side view of the slide movement member in the arrow Xb direction view of FIG. 10 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is an upper side figure of the slide moving member in arrow Xc direction view, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the slide moving member in the Xd-Xd line of Drawing 10 (a). It is a front perspective view of a distribution apparatus and a 2nd adjustment apparatus. (A) is a front view of a distribution apparatus and a 2nd adjustment apparatus, (b) is a side view of the distribution apparatus and a 2nd adjustment apparatus in the arrow XIIb direction view of Fig.12 (a), (c) 12 (a) is a top view of the sorting device and the second adjustment device in the direction of arrow XIIc in FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (d) is a diagram of the sorting device and the second adjustment device on line XIId-XIId in FIG. FIG. It is a front view of a delay device. It is a front view of a delay device. (A)-(c) is a sectional view of the 2nd adjustment device in the plane which intersects perpendicularly with the axis of rotation. (A) to (d) is a cross-sectional view of the functional disk device in which the functional disk device is sectioned in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a delay device. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a delay device. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a delay device. It is a partial front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) are partial front views of a delay device. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. (A) is a top view of the fan-like member, (b) is a side view of the fan-like member in the arrow XXIIIb direction view of FIG. 23 (a), (c) is a XXIII c- of FIG. 23 (a) It is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member in a XXIIIc line | wire, (d) is a bottom view of the fan-shaped member in the arrow XXIIId direction view of FIG.23 (b). (A) is a side view of a link member, (b) is a bottom view of the link member in the arrow XXIVb direction view of FIG. 24 (a). (A) is a top view of a fan-shaped member and a link member, (b) is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member and link member in the XXVb-XXVb line | wire of Fig.25 (a). It is a top view of a fixed floor. (A) is sectional drawing of the fixed bed in the XXVIIa-XXVIIa line of FIG. 26, (b) is sectional drawing of the fixed bed in the XXVIIb-XXVIIb line of FIG. (A) is a partial top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a), (c) is a portion of the delay floor device It is a top view and (d) is a sectional view of the delay bed device in the XXVIIId-XXVIIId line of Drawing 28 (c). (A) is a top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device taken along line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delay floor device (D) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed bed device taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd of FIG. 29 (c). (A) is a top view of a delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. (A) is a top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delay floor device 31 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device taken along line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. 31 (c). (A) is a top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delay floor device 32 (d) is a front view of the delay floor device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIId of FIG. 32 (c). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the delay bed device in the XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa line | wire of FIG.32 (c). (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the delay device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the delay device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial front views of a delay device. (A) to (c) are front views of the delay device in a 4th embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the delay device. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a continuous passage groove. (A) is a front view of a retention apparatus, (b) is a top view of the retention apparatus in the arrow XLIb direction view of Fig.41 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a retaining part and a retaining device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a retaining part and a retaining device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of when a ball which entered the 1st winning a prize mouth is detected, and an operation mode of each part. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove and retention device which shows an example of the motion of the ball | bowl in a continuous passage groove. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove and retention device which shows an example of the motion of the ball | bowl in a continuous passage groove. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the delay device in 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of an operation mode of an upper movable board and a lower movable board. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the delay device in the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of an operation mode of an upper movable board and a lower movable board. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 8th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a delay device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of when the ball which entered into V winning a prize mouth is detected, and an operation mode of each part. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of when the ball which entered into V winning a prize mouth is detected, and an operation mode of each part.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill (not shown), rails 61 and 62, and general winning The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is respectively held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Furthermore, for example, as the number of holding balls in the first winning opening 64 increases, it is controlled that a shorter period is more easily selected as the variable display period on the display device. Similarly, the second winning opening 640 is also controlled.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a front view triangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close the lower side of the opening / closing plate to the right. And). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state where it is easy for the specified winning opening 65a to win, and the open state and the closed state at normal times It works to repeat the state of alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the disposition position is also the lower right side of the first winning a prize opening 64 or the first Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 in a front view, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving a motorized part (including drive motors 5521, 6521, 6522, 8521 and 8522) is connected to the front side as the MPU 201 The various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include a drive motor 472.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 21. FIG. 5 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 5, a state is shown in which the delay device, which flows down the game area and into which the ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 flows, is disassembled from the game board 13.

  The ball having flowed into the first winning opening 64 flows down the inside of the delay device 300, is sent from the detection port 312d disposed at the lower end thereof, and passes through a detection sensor (not shown), whereby a lottery is performed. That is, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and before the detection sensor is passed, a lottery is not yet performed.

  Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is a front view of the delay device 300, and FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 taken along line VII-VII of FIG. In FIG. 7, the game board 13 is partially illustrated to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the delay device 300, a groove is formed in the inside, and the game board 13 that comes into contact with the groove forms a path through which the ball entering the first winning opening 64 flows down. A reduction gear 320 having a body member 310 and a slide moving member 321 slidingly moving relative to the body member 310, a first adjusting device 330 for adjusting the return operation of the reduction gear 320, and rotation relative to the body member 310 A distribution device 340 that operates and distributes balls to different flow paths, and a second adjustment device 350 that is configured coaxially with the rotation axis of the distribution device 340 and that adjusts the return operation of the distribution device 340 are mainly included.

  The main body member 310 is a member constituting a groove whose side opposite to the game board 13 is opened, and the first groove 311 from which the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 flows first, and the first A path which extends laterally from the connection portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312 and the second groove 312 extending vertically downward from the lower end of the passage 311 and which is longer than the extending length of the second groove 312 And a support plate which extends in a plate shape from the front side of the bottom plate opening 311b toward the lower side of the first groove 311 and supports the slide moving member 321. The unit 314 is mainly provided.

  The first groove 311 is a main passage 311a for lowering the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 obliquely downward in a straight line, and a ball at the central portion in the depth direction of the bottom plate of the main passage 311a (central portion in the depth direction of the ball) A bottom plate opening 311b which is an opening formed to a width shorter than the radius of the bottom, a top plate opening 311c which is opened with a width that allows the wind turbine member 322 of the reduction gear 320 to be A bearing portion 311d, which is disposed in a pair in the depth direction across the plate portion opening 311c and serves as a bearing for the wind turbine member 322, and a depth recessed so as to roll the ball from the main passage 311a to the far side. And a side recess portion 311e.

  The back side concave portion 311e is a concave portion connected in the vicinity of the inlet of the main passage 311a, and the bottom surface thereof has the same height as the bottom surface of the main passage 311a in the vicinity of the inlet, and the main passage 311a goes downstream. It is comprised in the aspect which inclines more than rising.

  The second groove 312 is an abutment wall 312a that applies a load that repels the ball reaching the lower end of the first groove 311 in the left and right direction, and a recess formed in the plate portion on the back side (the back side in FIG. 6) A concave portion 312b concaved in an arc shape so that the device 340 can be disposed, a receiving wall portion 312c serving as a rotation stopper for the distributing device 340 and receiving balls flowing from the third groove 313, and throwing balls A detection port 312 d and a side wall 312 e facing the recessed portion 312 b are mainly provided.

  The support plate portion 314 includes a pair of long holes 314 a through which the guide rod portion 321 c of the slide moving member 321 is inserted. The long hole 314 a is configured to be in the same direction as the long hole 331 a of the first adjustment device 330 (configured to overlap in the front-rear direction).

  The reduction gear 320 mainly includes a slide moving member 321 which slides as the ball passes through the first groove 311, and a wind turbine member 322 which is meshed with the slide moving member 321 and is in contact with the ball and rotates. Prepare for

  The slide moving member 321 is guided by the elongated hole 314 a of the main body member 310 and the elongated hole 331 a of the first adjusting device 330 described later, and is capable of linear operation.

  The wind turbine member 322 has a main gear portion 322a having a gear portion axially supported by the bearing portion 311d and meshed with the slide moving member 321 at the rear end, and radially from the shaft portion of the main gear portion 322a. It mainly includes a first extending wing portion 322b and a second extending wing portion 322c which are extended in a pair and which form an angle of 90 ° with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the first extending wing portion 322 b and the second extending wing portion 322 c are configured to be able to extend from the top plate portion opening 311 c toward the inside of the first groove 311 a, and In the initial state where the slide moving member 321 is maintained at the lower end position by gravity, the first extending wing portion 322b is disposed at a position where it can abut against the ball.

  The second extending wing portion 322c is provided with a protruding portion 322c1 having a tapered shape and protruding in a direction approaching the first groove 311 from the state shown in FIG. The convex portion 322c1 acts in such a manner as to separate the balls when they flow down the first groove in two consecutive balls.

  The first adjustment device 330 is a main body plate member 331 which is a plate-like member sandwiching the main body member 310 with the game board 13, and a main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 while being pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331. And a rotation biasing device 332 having a fixed gear portion 332a engaged with each other. The gear ratio of the fixed gear portion 332 a to the main body gear portion 322 a of the wind turbine member 322 is approximately 2. That is, as the wind turbine member 322 rotates 90 degrees, the rotation urging device 332 rotates 45 degrees.

  The main body plate member 331 is an elongated hole for guiding the slide moving member 321 and includes a pair of elongated holes 331a, and is also formed in the support plate portion 314 in which the elongated holes 314a having the same shape are disposed opposite to each other. By being guided by the long holes 314a and 331a, the slide moving member 321 is configured to be able to slide and move in the straight direction.

  The rotation biasing device 332 mainly includes a fixed gear portion 332a pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331, and a functional disk device 332b fixed to the fixed gear portion 332a at its axial end and having a recessed groove therein. Prepare for

  The sorting device 340 is a device pivotally supported by the central hole 345 in the main body member 310 on the right of the second groove 312 of the main body member 310, and in the initial state shown in FIG. The first wall portion 341 that receives the second wall portion 342 that is disposed opposite to the first wall portion 341 so as to be separated above the first wall portion 341, and the tip end portion of the second wall portion 342 An arc wall portion 343 formed along an arc shape centering on the rotation axis, and a disc shape and disposed at a surface position with the recessed portion 312 of the second groove 312 and on the back side of the second groove 312 It mainly includes a complementary plate portion 344 formed in such a manner as to complement a portion of the plate portion, and a central hole 345 which is a through hole pivotally supported by the main body member 310.

  The second wall portion 342 includes a distal end convex portion 342 a that is provided in a radially protruding manner at the extending distal end. The tip convex portion 342a can apply a load in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 6) to the sorting device 340 by the ball flowing down by coming into contact with the arc wall portion 343. As a result, it can be suppressed that the sorting device 340 returns to the initial position side.

  The initial position of the sorting device 340 is defined by a stopper portion S1 protruding toward the rear of the game board 13. That is, at the initial position, the sorting device 340 is stopped by the leading end of the arc wall portion 343 being stopped by the stopper portion S1. The driving force for rotating the distribution device 340 clockwise in a front view (clockwise in FIG. 6) is generated by the second adjustment device 350.

  The second adjustment device 350 is a device fixed to the complementary plate portion 344 of the distribution device 340, and is a device having a flow path in which the pseudo gravity center sphere GB for changing the gravity center in the inside is movable. 15 will be described later.

  FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 taken along line VIII-VIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the slide moving member 321 is disposed at the central portion of the main passage 311 a. Thus, when the slide moving member 321 protrudes inside the main passage 311a, the convex portion 321a1 can be reliably made to abut on the ball flowing down the first groove 311.

  A sphere flowing down the main passage 311a can flow into the back side recess 311e from the shape relationship. The back side recess portion 311e has a return wall portion 311e1 configured to be closer to the main passage 311a as it goes to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 8). As a result, the ball that has flowed into the back side recessed portion 311e can not be returned to the main passage 311a, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

  Next, the slide moving member 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the slide moving member 321, FIG. 10 (a) is a front view of the slide moving member 321, and FIG. 10 (b) is a view in the direction of arrow Xb of FIG. 10 (c) is a top view of the slide moving member 321 in the direction of arrow Xc in FIG. 10 (a), and FIG. 10 (d) is a side view of FIG. 10 (a). FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional view of the slide moving member 321 taken along line Xd-Xd of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the slide moving member 321 is a long plate-like first overhanging plate portion 321a which projects in a plane parallel to the main passage in the central portion of the main passage 311a of the delay device 300; A second overhanging plate portion 321b continuously connected to one end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and extending downward with respect to the extending direction of the first overhanging plate portion 321a; Round bar-shaped guide rod portions 321c in which a pair extends in parallel at both longitudinal direction end portions of the projecting portions 321a and 321b, and a depth direction with respect to the projecting plate portions 321a and 321b (Fig. 10 (a) And a rack gear portion 321d extending in a straight line at a position offset in the vertical direction and in which rack gear teeth are formed.

  The first overhanging plate portion 321a is a plate portion extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the main passage 311a in the assembled state (see FIG. 6), and is disposed at a diameter interval of balls A convex portion 321a1 is provided to be convexly formed in a semicircular shape from the upper surface. When the convex portion 321a1 abuts on the ball, the speed of the ball passing through the main passage 311a (see FIG. 8) is reduced.

  The second overhanging plate portion 321b includes a convex portion 321b1 which produces the same action as the convex portion 321a1, and an inclined surface 321b2 (see FIG. 10D) which is inclined downward toward the back side. When the second overhanging plate portion 321b projects inside the main passage 311a, the sloping surface 321b2 makes the flowing ball easy to face the back concave portion 311e (see FIG. 8). Therefore, in the main passage 311a, the passage period of the sphere can be extended as compared with the case where the sphere flows down in a straight line along the extending direction.

  Since the first extending plate portion 321a and the second extending plate portion 321b have different extending directions, the first extending plate portion 321a protrudes inside the main passage 311a while the second extending plate portion 321b is a main extension plate. A state of being disposed outside the passage 311 a can be formed. That is, although the degree of deceleration of the ball can be changed by the arrangement of the slide moving member 321, the details will be described later.

  The guide rod portion 321c is inserted into the long hole 331a of the first adjustment device 330 (see FIG. 6). Thereby, the slide moving member 321 is supported so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the long hole 331a.

  The rack gear portion 321d is extended in parallel with the extending direction of the long hole 331a, and the rack gear teeth are engaged with the main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 (see FIG. 6). Thus, the rotation of the wind turbine member 322 causes the rack gear portion 321d to slide in a linear direction (the extending direction of the long hole 331a).

  Next, the distribution device 340 and the second adjustment device 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjustment device 350, and FIG. 12 (a) is a front view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjustment device 350, and FIG. 12 (b) is a view It is a side view of distribution device 340 and the 2nd adjustment device 350 in arrow XIIb direction view of 12 (a), and Drawing 12 (c) shows distribution device 340 and the 2nd adjustment in arrow XIIc direction view of Drawing 12 (a). It is a top view of the apparatus 350, and FIG.12 (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the distribution apparatus 340 and the 2nd adjustment apparatus 350 in the XIId-XIId line | wire of Fig.12 (a). In addition, in FIG.12 (d), the state in which the pseudo gravity center ball | bowl GB got on the deceleration wall part 351d is shown in figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front side of the complementary plate portion 344 is open except for the portions occupied by the wall portions 341, 342, 343, and is used as a side wall of a passage through which a ball flows down (see FIG. 6). .

  The second adjustment device 350 is fixed to the back side of the complementary plate portion 344 and has a concaved flow path for causing the pseudo gravity center ball GB to flow downward, and a concave portion of the gravity center change device 351 And a lid member 352 fixed to the center-of-gravity changing device 351 in a manner of closing the lid.

  The center-of-gravity changing device 351 includes a disk-shaped main body member 351a having a shallow recessed portion, a recessed groove portion 351b recessed with a width that allows the pseudo gravity center ball GB to flow down in the main body member 351a, and the recessed groove portion And a decelerating mechanism extending on one side of the flow path partitioned by the partition wall 351c and the partition wall 351c that allows passage of the pseudo gravity center ball GB only at the tip end portion and decelerating the flow of the pseudo gravity center ball And one end (the lower end of FIG. 12A) of the partition wall 351c is pivotally supported pivotally on one side of the pseudo gravity center ball GB (FIG. 12A rightward direction) And the directional valve 351 e that only allows the passage of

  The position of the center of gravity of the second adjustment device 350 excluding the pseudo center of gravity ball GB is set to be the same as the rotation center. That is, the posture in which the distributing device 340 is stabilized is determined by which position the pseudo gravity center ball GB is disposed with respect to the rotation center.

  Here, the pseudo center-of-gravity sphere GB is formed of a sphere having a weight equal to or less than the weight of the sphere. For example, if the weight of the sphere is 5 grams, it is desirable to select a sphere of approximately 2 to 4 grams as the pseudo gravity center sphere GB. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where forces are balanced between the ball flowing into the distribution device 340 and the pseudo gravity center ball GB, and it becomes possible to rotate the distribution device 340 by the weight of the ball.

  The speed reducing mechanism of the speed reducing wall 351 d will be described with reference to FIG. The deceleration wall portion 351d is a portion that supports both sides of the ball from the lower side, and the ball rolls in that state. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the pseudo gravity center sphere GB does not roll at a portion where the length from the rotation axis is the maximum diameter (radius r1) (the center portion in the horizontal direction of FIG. 12 (d)). The rolling contact portion 351d rolls in a portion where the length from the rotation axis is a radius (radius r'1) shorter than the maximum diameter. Therefore, when the rotation speed of the pseudo gravity center ball GB is the same, the speed of the pseudo gravity center ball GB is reduced compared to the speed of the pseudo gravity center ball GB when rolling on the partition wall 351c (rolling with radius r1). It is possible to slow the speed of the pseudo gravity center ball GB when rolling on the wall portion 351d (rolling with radius r'1).

  That is, the translational movement distance around one rotation of the pseudo gravity center ball GB can be shortened. When the pseudo gravity center sphere GB is decelerated by this method, the deceleration can be performed while holding the rotational energy of the pseudo gravity center sphere GB, so the braking is too effective and the pseudo gravity center sphere GB stops at an unintended position. You can avoid the situation.

  Also, since the degree of deceleration of the pseudo gravity center ball GB can be arbitrarily set by setting the contact position (rolling radius of the pseudo gravity center ball GB) of the deceleration wall 351d and the pseudo gravity center ball GB, a special material (high friction And the like) are unnecessary, and the pseudo gravity center sphere GB can be sufficiently decelerated even when the formation distance of the decelerating wall portion 351d is short.

  Next, the operation of the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 and 14 are front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 13 shows the state immediately after the ball flows one ball through the main body member 310 in the initial state shown in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 shows the state immediately after the ball flows one ball through the main body member 310 in the state of FIG. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the ball passes, the distributing device 340 changes its posture to the initial state (see FIG. 6) and the change state (see FIG. 13), and the reduction gear 320 counts the number of passing balls. Thus, the state (arrangement in the height direction) changes in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), and the raised state (see FIG. 14).

  Each state of the reduction gear 320 will be described. When the reduction gear 320 is in the intermediate state, the slide moving member 321 is moved, and the convex portion 321a is disposed at a position where the convex portion 321a protrudes from the bottom surface of the main passage 311a. Therefore, in this state, the ball which has flowed into the main passage 311 a comes in contact with the convex portion 321 a and flows down while being decelerated. In the intermediate state, the second overhanging plate portion 321 b is disposed outside the first groove 311.

  When the reduction gear 320 is in the raised state, the slide moving member 321 further projects into the main passage 311a, and the second overhang plate portion 321b is disposed above the bottom surface of the back side recessed portion 311e. Since the second overhanging plate portion 321b has the inclined surface 321b (see FIG. 10) on the upper surface, the sphere that has flowed into the main passage 311a in this state is the back side recessed portion 311e along the inclination of the inclined surface 321b. After flowing to the lower end portion of the back concave portion 311e, the main passage 311a joins again.

  When the reduction gear 320 is in the raised state, the road width (the width in the height direction) of the main passage 31a is narrowed by the first overhang plate portion 321a protruding inside the main passage 311a. Further, in the present embodiment, the sliding movement member 321 slides in a direction inclined with respect to the extending direction of the main passage 311a, whereby the contact wall 312a of the second groove 312 and the first overhanging plate portion 321a. The width with the end narrows. Therefore, deceleration of the ball can be performed by narrowing the path width of the main passage 311 a and narrowing the path width of the connection portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312 to increase the flow path resistance.

  Each state of the distribution device 340 will be described. When the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the balls flowing into the sorting device 340 are received by the first wall portion 341. Then, the weight of the ball rotates the distributing device 340 until it changes (see FIG. 13), and the ball flows into the detection port 312d.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 312 e is configured to project upward (outward at a height greater than the radius of the ball) than the first wall portion 341, the ball flows into the third groove 313 side Is suppressed. Therefore, when the distributing device 340 is in the initial state, the balls flowing into the distributing device 340 can be made to flow down vertically with high probability (the flow can be made to flow down in the shortest period).

  When the distribution device 340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 13), the ball flowing into the distribution device 340 abuts on the arc wall portion 343 and flows into the third groove 313. In addition, since the arc wall portion 343 is formed in an arc shape centering on the center hole 345 of the distribution device 340, the load when the ball collides is applied in the direction toward the rotation shaft of the distribution device 340. Applying a load in the rotational direction to the distribution device 340 is suppressed.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution apparatus 340 from returning to the initial state unintentionally by the impact given by the ball flowing into the distribution apparatus 340 to the distribution apparatus 340 in the change state, and the distribution apparatus 340 changes for a predetermined period. It can be ensured that the state is maintained.

  Next, adjustment of the posture change timing of the distribution device 340 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.15 (a) to FIG.15 (c) is sectional drawing of the 2nd adjustment apparatus 350 in the plane orthogonal to a rotating shaft. In FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c), the internal structure of the gravity center changing device 351 is visible, and in FIG. 15 (a), the case where the distributing device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6) is shown. In FIG. 15 (b), the case where the distribution device 340 is in the change state (see FIG. 13) is illustrated, and in FIG. 15 (c), the state immediately before the distribution device 340 can return from the change state to the initial state. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the second adjusting device 350, the pseudo gravity center ball GB moves inside the recessed groove portion 351b in accordance with the change in the posture. As a result, the position of the center of gravity of the second adjustment device 350 changes, and the second adjustment device 350 repeats stop and rotation.

  The operation of the second adjusting device 350 will be described. As shown in FIG. 15A, in the case where the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the pseudo gravity center sphere GB is disposed on the right side of the central hole 345. A load is applied in the direction of rotating the second adjustment device 350 clockwise in a front view (clockwise in FIG. 15). Thereby, even if the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates to some extent, the distributing device 340 can maintain the posture at the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b), when the distribution device 340 is changed (see FIG. 13), the inclination formed by the partition wall 351c and the direction valve 351e is inclined downward to the left. The inclination of the decelerating wall portion 351d is inclined downward as it goes to the right. Therefore, the pseudo gravity center ball GB rolls on the upper side of the partition wall 351c and flows leftward along the arrow L1, drops to the decelerating wall 351d at the end, and rolls on the upper side of the decelerating wall 351d to the arrow L2 Flow to the right along the

  As a result, the pseudo gravity center sphere GB can be sent to the left of the center hole 345, so that the second adjustment device 350 is rotated counterclockwise (FIG. 15 counterclockwise) by the weight of the pseudo gravity center sphere GB. Load is given in the direction. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the distribution device 340 in a constant state (a period until the pseudo gravity center ball GB passes to the right of the center hole 345) in a changing state.

  The period during which the change state is maintained can be arbitrarily changed according to the degree to which the pseudo gravity center ball GB is decelerated by the deceleration wall portion 351d. For example, if the flow-down speed of the pseudo gravity center ball GB is halved by the decelerating wall portion 351 d, the period for maintaining the distributing device 340 in a changed state can be doubled.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of the deceleration wall 351d. For example, there is exemplified a method of reducing the translational movement speed of the pseudo gravity center ball GB by reducing the rotation radius of the point where the pseudo gravity center ball GB contacts the deceleration wall 351 d (see FIG. 12D). That is, by receiving the rotation of the pseudo gravity center ball GB not at the maximum diameter portion (central portion) but at the portion with a small diameter (near the end portion), the translational movement distance around one rotation of the pseudo gravity center ball GB It is a method of shortening the speed of the artificial gravity center ball GB without shortening the rotational speed. According to this method, it is possible to increase the translational velocity of the pseudo gravity center sphere GB after passing through the decelerating wall portion 351d, as compared with the case where the rotation speed of the pseudo gravity center sphere GB is reduced.

  Therefore, immediately after reaching the right end of the deceleration wall 351 d, the pseudo gravity center sphere GB can be thrown to the right at a high speed, and immediately after the pseudo gravity center sphere GB reaches the right end of the deceleration wall 351 d, FIG. The period until the state change to the state shown in (c) can be shortened.

  As shown in FIG. 15C, the pseudo gravity center sphere GB passes through the direction valve 351 e before and after the distribution device 340 changes from the change state to the initial state. As shown in FIG. 15C, the directional valve 351e allows the pseudo gravity center sphere GB to flow to the right while preventing the pseudo gravity center sphere GB from flowing to the left. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pseudo center of gravity ball GB from bouncing back to the left of the central hole 345.

  In this embodiment, the period from when the sorting device 340 changes to the change state until the state returns to the initial state is a change period that is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) is four. It is set to a period longer than (minimum fluctuation period).

  Therefore, when the ball enters the sorting device when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state and the ball enters the detection opening 312d (see FIG. 6), the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 becomes four. The ball that has entered the distribution device 340 before the change that starts thereafter is over (before the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 can be vacated) is distributed to the third groove 313 (see FIG. 13) without omission. Then, while the ball passes the third groove 313, the variation of 1 at the winning opening 64 ends, and the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 becomes vacant, so that the winning opening 64 overflows (the number of holding balls is maximum) By entering the ball into the detection port 312d, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where the opportunity for lottery can not be obtained despite the fact that the ball enters the ball.

  The degree of deceleration of the ball in the third groove 313 can be set by various methods. For example, the ball may be decelerated by attaching a high friction sheet to the bottom wall on which the ball rolls.

  Here, as a first setting example, a period until the ball passes through the third groove 313 is, for example, a fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is four. By setting a longer period, when two balls enter the distribution device 340 in a row, the first ball enters the detection port 312d and then the second ball is the third groove The period from passing 313 to entering the detection port 312d can be made longer than the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected when the number of balls held by the winning opening 64 is four. Thus, the occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64 can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a second setting example, a period until the ball passes through the third groove 313 is, for example, a fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is three, and the number of holding balls is four. By setting the period longer than the combined period of the fluctuation period (the shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected in the case of one, even when two spheres are continuously entered in the third groove 313, one Since two variations are digested in a period from when the eye ball enters the detection port 312d to when the second ball passes the third groove 313 and enters the detection port 312d, Even if two spheres enter the detection port 312d, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the overflow.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the function disc device 332 b will be described. In the functional disc device 332b, the position of the center of gravity of the functional disc device 332b changes in the same manner as the second adjustment device 350 by moving the pseudo gravity center ball GB disposed between the functional disc device 332 (see FIG. 7). It is a device in which the direction of the load given to 332 b changes.

  16 (a) to 16 (d) are cross-sectional views of the functional disc device 332b in which the functional disc device 332b is sectioned in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. 16A shows the case where the reduction gear 320 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), and FIG. 16B shows the state immediately after the reduction gear 320 changes from the initial state to the intermediate state (see FIG. 13). 16 (c) shows the state immediately after the reduction gear 320 changes from the intermediate state to the rising state (see FIG. 14), and FIG. 16 (d) shows the reduction gear 320 from the intermediate state to the initial state. The state immediately after the state change is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the functional disk device 332 b is a partition that divides the recessed groove portion 332 b 1 recessed from the back side by a depth to which the pseudo gravity center ball GB can move, and a portion that limits the passage of the ball A ball is disposed as a rollable plate below the wall 332b2 and its partition wall 332b2 and is formed to project a predetermined width from the end of the partition wall 332b2 and to slow down the flow of the pseudo gravity center ball GB A first deceleration wall 332b3, a second deceleration wall 332b4 disposed on the opposite side of the partition 332b2 with the first deceleration wall 332b3 interposed therebetween, and slowing down the flow of the pseudo gravity center ball GB, and the pseudo gravity center ball GB And a directional valve 332 b 5 that restricts the passage of the valve in one direction from left to right.

  In addition, as the pseudo gravity center sphere GB, for convenience, the same code as the pseudo gravity center sphere GB housed in the second adjustment device 350 is used, and the shape and weight of the pseudo gravity center sphere GB are limited to the same. It is not the purpose.

  The functional disk device 332b can also cause the pseudo gravity center ball GB to flow down the first reduction wall portion 332b3 and pass the directional valve 332b5, and can also allow the second reduction wall portion 332b4 to flow the directional valve 332b5. . The operation of the functional disk device 332b will be described in detail below. Note that FIG. 6, FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the reduction gear 3420 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the partition plate 332b is inclined downward to the right, and the pseudo gravity center sphere GB is a functional disk device Maintained on the right side of 332b. Thus, the load for maintaining the slide moving member 321 downward is applied from the rotation biasing device 332 to the slide moving member 321 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates, it is possible to suppress the slide moving member 321 from moving up and down.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the reduction gear 3420 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), the partition plate 332b2 is inclined downward to the left while the first reduction wall portion 332b3 is It is considered to be a mode in which it slopes downward to the right. Therefore, the pseudo gravity center sphere GB rolls the upper surface of the partition plate 332b2 leftward along the arrow L3, and then rolls the upper surface of the first reduction wall 332b3 rightward along the arrow L4. The center of gravity ball GB is sent to the right of the rotation center of the functional disc device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disc device 332b to the initial state (the direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

  While the pseudo gravity center ball GB is disposed on the left side of the rotation center as shown in FIG. 16 (b) in the middle of the flow of the pseudo gravity center ball GB, the disk unit 332b is counterclockwise in FIG. Since the load is applied in the direction of rotation, it is possible to stop the lowering of the slide moving member 321 due to gravity. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the slide moving member 321 is lowered by the weight of the ball (even if it is lowered, it is possible to form a state in which the ball moves up as soon as the ball comes back).

  As shown in FIG. 16C, when the reduction gear 3420 is in the raised state (see FIG. 14), the first reduction wall portion 332b3 is inclined downward to the left while the second reduction wall is formed. The portion 332 b 4 is inclined downward to the right. Therefore, the pseudo gravity center ball GB rolls the upper surface of the first reduction wall 332b3 leftward along the arrow L5, and then rolls the upper surface of the second reduction wall 332b4 right along the arrow L6. As a result, the pseudo gravity center ball GB is sent to the right of the rotation center of the functional disc device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction to return the functional disc device 332b to the initial state (clockwise direction in FIG. 16).

  When the pseudo gravity center ball GB is rolling on the upper surface of the first reduction wall portion 332b3, the ball passes through the main passage 311a and the reduction gear 320 moves to the rising state and the functional disk device 332b is as shown in FIG. In the case of the posture shown in, the pseudo gravity center ball GB is thereafter decelerated by the first reduction wall portion 332b3 and further decelerated by the second reduction wall portion 332b4, so the reduction gear 320 is in the intermediate state As compared with the case (see FIG. 13), the period until the pseudo gravity center sphere GB is disposed to the right of the rotation center is lengthened. Therefore, the reduction gear 320 can be maintained in the raised state (see FIG. 14) for a long time as compared with the period in which the intermediate state (see FIG. 13) is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (d), when the pseudo gravity center ball GB disposed on the first reduction wall portion 332b3 or the second reduction wall portion 332b4 is disposed to the right of the center of the functional circle device 332b, the slide moving member The weight of 321 operates the reduction gear 320 to make the functional disk device 332b the same posture as the initial state, and the pseudo gravity center ball GB is discharged from the first reduction wall 332b3 or the second reduction wall 332b4 and is a recessed groove Roll 332b1. When the pseudo gravity center ball GB passes through the direction valve 332 b 5, the functional disk device 332 b returns to the initial state (see FIG. 16A).

  The flow-down pattern of the ball flowing down the inside of the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) show the case where three balls P1 to P3 are entered in a row from the winning opening 64, and FIG. In a), the state in which the balls P1 to P3 are disposed in front of the wind turbine member 322 is illustrated, and in FIG. 17 (b), the ball P1 and the ball P2 are separated into the second extending wings 322 c of the wind turbine member 322 18A shows the state in which the ball P2 pushes the second extension wing 322c and reaches the distribution device 340, and FIG. 18B shows the state in which the ball P3 is the third. A state in which the two grooves 312 begin to enter is illustrated.

  17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b), the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in the space at the lower right of the structural drawing. The graph which shows the condition of is illustrated. In addition, although the timing at which the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 actually deviates slightly (about 0.2 seconds), the graphs show that the balls P1 to P3 have a prize in order to facilitate understanding. It is illustrated as having entered into the mouth 64 simultaneously, and the horizontal axis is configured as an elapsed time T.

  In the graph, the timing ("IN") at which the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 and the timing ("OUT") at which the balls enter the detection opening 312d are illustrated, and the balls P1 to P3 are Which section is to be flowed down is illustrated by a code. In addition, with regard to which timing of the graph the states shown in FIG. 17A, FIG. 17B, FIG. 18A and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, until the wind turbine member 322 is reached, the balls P1 to P3 flow down the first groove 311 under the same conditions, and there is no difference in the speed.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the first ball P1 pushes the first extended wing 322b of the wind turbine member 322, and the second ball P2 is separated from the second extended wing 322c. The leading ball P1 flows downward without being decelerated to the convex portion 321a1, while the convex portion 321a1 protrudes to the inside of the main passage 311a on the downstream side of the ball P2. Therefore, when the ball P2 and the ball P3 contact the convex portion 321a1, they are intermittently given a load in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction, and decelerated. Thereby, since the space between the ball P1 and the ball P2 can be opened, for example, it is prevented that the ball is clogged by entering two balls at the same time into the distributing device 340 and the malfunction is generated. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the first groove passage first period required for the ball P1 to pass through the first groove 311 is 2 seconds (T11 = 2s), and after the ball P1 passes, the reduction gear 320 The deceleration return first start period, which is the period from the intermediate state to the start of return to the initial state, is 5 seconds, and the reduction gear is set to return to the initial state one second after the start of return.

  In addition, the second period T2 which is a period from the ball P1 entering the second groove 312 to the ball entering the detection opening 312d is 1.5 seconds (T2 = 1.5 s). Note that the second period T2 is the first half of the second period T2a (T2a = 1s), which is one second before reaching the distribution device 340, and the second half of the second period, which is 0.5 seconds after passing the distribution device 340. It is divided into T2b (T2b = 0.5 s), and regardless of the state of the distribution device 340, the period in which the ball passes through the second groove 312 is invariable.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the second ball P2 pushes on the second extending wing 322c of the wind turbine member 322, the preceding ball P2 flows into the second groove while the ball P3 is The liquid flows into the back side recess 311 e along the inclined surface 321 b 2 of the slide moving member 321. Thereby, in addition to being decelerated by the convex portion 321a1, the flow-down path of the ball P3 is extended by an amount corresponding to passing through the back side concave portion 311e, so the space between the ball P2 and the ball P3 can be spaced.

  In the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the ball P2 to pass through the first groove 311 is 3 seconds (T12 = 3s), and the ball P3 passes through the first groove 311. The first groove passage third period T13 required for the above is 6 seconds (T13 = 6s). In addition, the deceleration return second start period, which is the period from when the ball P2 passes through to when the reduction gear 320 starts to return to the initial state (from the rising state), is 7 seconds. It is set to return to the initial state.

  Further, since the ball P2 is in contact with the arc wall portion 343 of the distribution device 340 and flows into the third groove 313, the path to the detection port 312d is extended compared to the ball P1. Thus, the distance between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the third period T3 required for the balls P2 and P3 to pass through the third groove 313 is 3 seconds (T3 = 3s). Further, the speed of the pseudo gravity center sphere GB of the second adjustment device 350 is in a mode in which the distribution maintaining period BT1 which is a period from the state change of the distribution device 340 to the change state to the start of recovery to the initial state is 4 seconds. It is set (BT1 = 4s).

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), when the reduction gear 320 is in the raised state, the distance between the end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the abutment wall 312a is approximately the same as the diameter of the ball. Be done. Therefore, the balls P2 and P3 are strongly resisted when passing between the end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the abutment wall 312a, and the momentum is dropped. Thus, the distance between the sphere P1 and the spheres P2 and P3 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the ball P2 flows down the third groove 313 and presses the first wall portion 341 against the receiving wall portion 312c to make it easy to maintain the distributing device 340 in a changed state. it can.

  As shown in the graph, the distribution device 340 is maintained in the change state also at the timing when the sphere P3 flows into the distribution device 340 (at the timing when only the distribution maintenance period BT1 has elapsed since the distribution device 340 changed into the change state. The ball P3 reaches the distribution device 340). Therefore, the ball P3 flows into the third groove 313. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the distance between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 from being reduced.

  As shown in the graph, according to the present embodiment, when the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in a row, the balls P1 and P2 enter the detection opening 312d at an interval of 4 seconds, and the ball P2 And the ball P3 enter at intervals of 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, since the fluctuation period of 1 selected after the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 becomes maximum is set to 3 seconds, in the case of FIG. 17 and FIG. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the distribution device 340 is maintained in the changing state is one fluctuation period selected after the number of balls held by the winning opening 64 becomes maximum when the ball flows into the detection opening 312d. Since the period is longer than the period, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the ball P2 enters the distributing device 340 during the fluctuation period, the ball P2 is reliably made to flow into the third groove 313. be able to. Thereby, when a ball enters the distribution device 340 continuously, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an overflow.

  Therefore, even when three balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in a row, it is possible to shift the timing at which they enter the detection opening 312d and to suppress the occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64. Can. As a result, even if the player does not pay special attention, it is possible to avoid a situation where a lottery can not be received even though the ball enters the winning opening 64, and the game can be performed comfortably.

  In the present embodiment, when another ball enters the winning opening 64 in a row behind the ball P3 (when four balls enter in a row), the fourth ball and the ball P3 The timing of entering the detection port 312d can not be shifted. Therefore, it is desirable to recommend a stop shot so as not to play a game in which even four balls enter the winning opening 64 when the number of balls held by the winning opening 64 is three.

  In addition, as shown in the graph, when the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 continuously, for example, the ball P3 is spaced at least one second after entering the winning opening 64 of the ball P1. When the ball P3 reaches the distributing device 340 when entering the ball 64, the distributing device 340 is returned to the initial state, so the ball P3 flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction and the detection port 312d Enter the ball. In this case, the delay period of the ball P3 is not sufficient, and the overflow at the winning opening 64 can not be suppressed.

  Therefore, the effect that overflow is suppressed when the third ball enters the winning opening 64 is limited condition (the ball P1 enters the ball after the ball P1 and the ball P2 continuously enter the winning opening 64) The player can play only in a situation where the ball P3 enters the winning opening 64 within one second from 1 If you forget to stop hitting the ball with the number of balls being 3), you can fortunately create a situation where no overflow occurs in the winning opening 64 if the situation is aligned.

  Thus, it is possible to achieve a clear difference in the number of lottery opportunities for the number of balls entered into the winning opening 64 between the player who does the stop and the player who does not perform the stop. In a rare situation in which three balls enter the winning opening 64 continuously when the holding ball number of the opening 64 is 3, in the rare situation, the overflow at the winning opening 64 does not occur even for the third ball P3 The conditions can be tightened (the pitching interval is limited), and valuables can be produced when overflow does not occur.

  As a result, since the player who performs the strike can perform the strike more carefully (because it is possible to stop the launch at an early stage by paying attention to the number of holding balls), a lottery opportunity The operation of the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) for acquiring more can be performed with enthusiasm, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the case where the balls P4 and P5 enter the delay device 300 at an interval will be described. 19 (a), 19 (b) and 20 are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. FIG. 19 (a) shows a state in which the ball P4 has reached the wind turbine member 322 when the reduction gear 320 is in the initial state, and in FIG. 19 (b), the reduction gear 320 is in an intermediate state, and the distribution device 340 is The figure shows a case where the ball P5 enters the winning opening 64 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters the detection opening 312d (4 seconds after the ball P4 enters the ball), which is in a changed state. At 20, the state immediately before the ball P5 enters the distribution device 340 is illustrated. 19 (a), 19 (b) and 20, a graph showing the situation after the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 in the space at the lower right of the structural drawing has a horizontal axis. It is illustrated as an elapsed time T.

  In the graph, the timing ("IN") at which the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 and the timing ("OUT") at which the ball enters the detection opening 312d are illustrated. It is illustrated with a code whether it flows down the section. Further, which timing of the graph the states shown in FIGS. 19A, 19B, and 20 represent is illustrated by triangle marks in the corresponding drawings.

  In the state shown in FIG. 20, the ball P5 does not enter the third groove 313, but flows down the second groove 312 vertically downward and enters the detection port 312d. Here, if the ball P5 enters the detection opening 312d before the fluctuation immediately after the ball P4 enters the detection opening 312d, an overflow may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the ball P5 to pass through the reduction gear 320 in the intermediate state, the period of fluctuation when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is four (3 The second groove is set to be longer than the second) (the first groove passage second period T12 is set to 3 seconds). In this case, even if the ball P5 does not flow into the third groove 313 (downflow in the second groove 312 in the vertical direction), the variation is finished before the ball P5 passes over the slide moving member 321. Overflow can be prevented from occurring at the winning opening 64. In this case, since the ball P5 does not flow down the third groove 313, the timing of the lottery by the ball P5 can be advanced, and the player can be prevented from being bored.

  In addition, since the distribution maintaining period BT1 from the state change of the distributing device 340 to the start to return to the initial state is 4 seconds, it takes 3 seconds after the ball P4 enters the winning opening 64 (pricing opening It is possible to reliably cause the ball, which has entered in the period of fluctuation when the number of retained balls of 64 is four, to enter the third groove 313. In addition, since it is possible to cause the ball to enter the third groove 313 until just before the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state thereafter, it takes less than 4 seconds after the ball P4 enters the winning opening 64. The sphered ball can be reliably entered into the third groove 313. Thus, even when the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 at an interval of 3 seconds or less, the occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64 can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the case where the ball enters the distribution device 340 continuously will be described. In the present embodiment, for example, when the reduction gear 320 is in the raised state (see FIG. 14), two additional balls enter the winning opening 64 continuously (for example, as shown in FIG. After the balls P1 and P2 shown in a) enter the ball and the ball P2 enters the second groove 312, two balls are continuously generated and enter the winning opening 64). 21 (a) to 21 (c) are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the distribution device 340 is in the initial state and the ball P6 enters the distribution device 340, and in FIG. 21 (b), the distribution device 340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P6 A state in which P 7 is pushed out is illustrated, and in FIG. 21C, a state in which the ball P 6 flows down the second groove 312 and the ball P 7 flows down the third groove 313 is illustrated.

  As shown to Fig.21 (a), the distribution apparatus 340 is provided with the space which can accommodate only one ball between the 1st wall part 341 and the 2nd wall part 342. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when two balls in a row reach the distribution device 340, the first ball P6 is accommodated in the distribution device 340, but the second ball P7 remains without being accommodated. Therefore, only the sphere P6 can flow down to the detection port 312d alone.

  The tip convex portion 342a disposed at the tip of the second wall 342 of the sorting device 340 has the ball P7 to the inlet of the third groove 313 in a posture in which the ball P7 is left outside (see FIG. 21B). It is formed in a manner to push it out (the inlet of the third groove 313 is formed at a position facing the tip convex portion 342 a). Therefore, the ball P7 can be pushed out to the back side of the third groove 313, and the ball P7 can be prevented from staying near the entrance of the third groove 313. This prevents, for example, the ball P7 from entering the distribution device 340 (not pushed well into the third groove 313) even when the distribution device 340 is set in such a manner that the change state is immediately returned to the initial state. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, the sphere P6 enters the detection port 312d at the border of the distribution device 340, and the sphere P7 falls into the detection port 312d after flowing down the third groove 313. Here, as described above, the third period T3 in which the ball P7 flows down the third groove 313 is set to 3 seconds, and the period is selected after the number of balls held by the winning opening 64 is maximized. Since the variation period of 1 (3 seconds) or more, the ball P7 enters the detection opening 312d even if the ball P6 enters the detection opening 312d when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is three. Around 1 the change ends. Therefore, when the ball P7 enters the detection opening 312d, the occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, when another ball enters the detection opening 312d within 3 seconds after the ball P7 enters the detection opening 312d, an overflow at the winning opening 64 is generated for the ball. Ru. Thus, while it is possible to suppress the overflow if the number of balls entering the ball in a short period is two, it is possible to configure a flow path in which the overflow occurs when the number of balls entering the ball in the short period is three. Therefore, it is possible to make the player carefully think about the firing strength of the ball and the firing frequency of the ball in order to obtain more chances of drawing at the winning opening 64, and the game characteristics regarding the mode of firing the ball are improved. It can be done.

  In addition, since the distribution device 340 rotates from the initial state to the change state only with the weight of the sphere, the sphere P6 and the sphere P7 are disposed between the side wall portion 312e and the tip convex portion 342a, It is possible to solve the problem that occurs only when the distribution device 340 operates electrically, such as the distribution device 340 operates and ball clogging occurs.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 21C, for example, the ball reaches the distributing device 340 at the timing when the distributing device 340 returns to the initial state within one second after arrival, and the next ball is further distributed If it reaches the sorting device 340 one second after returning to the initial state 340, there is a possibility that the ball arriving first and the ball arriving later may collide at the joining position of the first groove 311 and the third groove 313. In this case, two balls enter the detection port 312d at an interval of 3 seconds or less. Therefore, when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 20) is three while the previous ball passes the third groove 313, the overflow in the winning opening 64 can not be avoided.

  This is largely different from the case where two balls reach the distribution device 340 when the distribution device 340 is in the initial state. That is, when two balls reach the distributing device 340 at an interval of 2 seconds when the distributing device 340 is in the initial state, the subsequent balls are guided to the third groove 313, so that the balls enter the detection port 312d. The interval to be set can secure 3 seconds or more (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the ball reaches the distributing device 340 at intervals of 2 seconds when the distributing device 340 is in the changed state, the previous ball is guided to the third groove 313, and the latter ball vertically downwards the second groove 312. A flow may occur, and the interval at which the detection port 312d enters the ball may be shorter than 3 seconds.

  Thereby, when two balls enter the ball entrance 64 continuously, it is possible to configure a flow path which can not always suppress the overflow. Therefore, while having a mechanism capable of suppressing the overflow, basically, it is assumed that the maximum number of lottery can be obtained by playing a game of stopping when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 reaches three. It can improve the meaning of hitting.

  The delayed floor device 400 will then be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 22, in the delay bed device 400, a part of the balls flowing down the left side of the center frame 86 flows in (through a so-called “warp channel”), and the balls roll on the top A movable device configured to be capable of repeating a reciprocating operation and dropping a ball whose velocity in the left-right direction converges to zero to the front side, and is formed by a pair of front and rear and configured to be capable of tilting operation. A link member 420 (see FIG. 24) for matching the movement of the pair of fans 410, and a fixed floor which supports the fans 410 in a tiltable manner and through which the balls pass before flowing into the fans 410. A fixed floor 430 is mainly provided.

  In the initial state (see FIG. 22), the delay floor device 400 is configured in such a manner that the sphere can be easily converged to the center position in the left-right direction (the left and right peripheral portions of the fixed floor 430 incline downward toward the center position And the center position of the fan-shaped member 410 and the center position of the winning opening 64 are arranged in a vertical positional relationship. That is, the arrangement is such that the ball can be easily entered from the delay floor device 400 into the winning opening 64.

  Among the fan-shaped members 410 arranged in a pair in the front and rear, the front fan-shaped members 410 can be inclined in a manner of being inclined forward toward the front side so that the balls can easily enter the winning opening 64.

  The fan-shaped member 410 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, since a pair of fan-shaped members 410 are comprised from the same member, description of one fan-shaped member 410 is given and description of the other fan-shaped member 410 is omitted.

  Fig.23 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410, FIG.23 (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the arrow XXIIIb direction view of Fig.23 (a), FIG.23 (c) is FIG. 23D is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 taken along line XXIIIc-XXIIIc of FIG. 23A, and FIG. 23D is a bottom view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the arrow XXIIId direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the fan-shaped member 410 includes a main body member 411 formed of a fan-like plate member, and an extending arm portion 412 coaxially extending in the left-right direction from an intermediate position of the main body member 411. A convex fixing portion 413 having a through hole through which the connecting rod 414 is fixedly inserted from the bottom of the main body member 411 and a connecting bar 414 inserted and fixed to the convex fixing portion 413; Prepare mainly.

  The tapered side (the lower side in FIG. 23A) of the body member 411 has a width about the diameter of a sphere. In addition, on the tapered side, it has a chamfered portion 411 a that slopes downward, and has an opening 411 b drilled between the convex fixing portions 413.

  The connecting rod 414 is configured as a separate member from the main body member 411. When assembling, after disposing the link member 420 (see FIG. 24) between the convex fixing portions 413, the connection rod 414 is inserted into the adjustment long hole 422 of the link member 420, 414 is fixed to the convex fixing portion 413. Thereby, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 can be connected (refer FIG. 25).

  Next, referring to FIG. 24, the link member 420 will be described. The link member 420 is a member that connects the pair of fan-shaped members 410 and has a role of defining the movement direction in a fixed manner.

  Fig.24 (a) is a side view of the link member 420, and FIG.24 (b) is a bottom view of the link member 420 in the arrow XXIVb direction view of Fig.24 (a). As shown in FIG. 24, the link member 420 has a main body member 421 formed of a plate-like member having a constant L-shaped cross section (see FIG. 24B), and a pair of front and rear in the upper part of the main body member 421. Mainly provided with an adjustment long hole 422 bored in the thickness direction and extending in the front-rear direction, and a support long hole 423 pierced in the thickness direction at the lower part of the main body member 421 and extending in the vertical direction .

  The adjustment long hole 422 is a hole through which the connecting rod 414 (see FIG. 23) of the fan-shaped member 410 is inserted. That is, the link member 420 and the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected via the adjustment long holes 422. The support elongated holes 423 are elongated holes through which the support convex portions 434 (see FIG. 26) of the fixed floor 430 are inserted, and act in such a manner as to designate the moving direction of the link member 420 in one direction (vertical direction).

  The fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the front assembly state will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420, and FIG. 25 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. . Note that the front assembly state shown in FIG. 25 refers to the subassembly state prior to assembly to the fixed floor 430. In the manufacturing process, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430 after configuring this pre-assembled state.

  In the front assembly state, the connecting rod 414 of the fan-like member 410 is fixed to the convex fixing portion 413 in a state of being inserted into the adjustment long hole 422 of the link member 420, thereby connecting the fan-like member 410 and the link member 420 to each other. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 25, since the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected by the link member 420, when one fan-shaped member 410 operates, the operation is transmitted to the other fan-shaped member 410 via the link member 420. Configured in an aspect.

  Next, the fixed bed 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 is a top view of fixed bed 430, and FIG. 27 (a) is a cross-sectional view of fixed bed 430 taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 26, and FIG. 27 (b) is XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of fixed bed 430 in a line. In FIGS. 26 and 27, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are shown removed. Further, in FIG. 26, the support portion 432 is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 26, 27 (a) and 27 (b), the fixed floor 430 is provided with the fan-shaped member 410 in the assembled state (see FIG. 22), and the upper surface of the fan-shaped member 410 and the fixed floor 430 are provided. The portion between the rotation axes of the fan-shaped member 410 is recessed corresponding to the thickness of the fan-shaped member 410 so as to be formed in the surface position and the outer portion thereof is recessed in a manner not to interfere with the movement of the fan-shaped member 410 Recessed floor 431, a support portion 432 supporting the extending arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 when disposed on the recessed floor 431, and a vertical opening in the central portion of the recessed floor 431 A hollow portion 433 which is a hollow, a support convex portion 434 protruding in a lateral direction from a side wall forming the hollow portion 433 and a position deviated to the left or right from the position where the fan-shaped member 410 approaches closest in the assembled state. Sphere can flow An inlet 435 which is recessed in a size, a delay channel 436 balls flowing down communicated with from the inlet 435 mainly comprises a.

  The support portion 432 includes a support groove portion 432a having a groove shape for supporting the extending arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410, and a support cover portion 432b which covers the support groove portion 432a from above and covers the support groove portion 432a.

  The hollow portion 433 is a hollow in which the link member 420 is accommodated, and the support convex portion 434 is a protrusion which is inserted into the support elongated hole 423 of the link member 420. When the link member 420 is assembled, the link member 420 is inserted into the gap between the hollow portion 433 and the tip of the support protrusion 434, and then the link member 420 is slid in the lateral direction to support the support protrusion. The portion 434 can be inserted into the support elongated hole 423.

  The inlet 435 is composed of a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, in the case where the member is covered above the inflow port 435 in a manner of blocking a part of the inflow port 435, it is impossible for the ball to flow into the inflow port 435.

  The delay flow path 436 is a flow path for delaying the ball entering the winning opening 64 with respect to the ball directly entering the winning opening 64 from the fan-shaped member 410. For example, an overflow may occur in the winning opening 64 by making the time taken for the ball to pass through the delay channel 436 longer than the fluctuation period of 1 caused by the ball entering the winning opening 64 as a trigger. It can be suppressed.

  For example, by setting the time taken for the balls to pass through the delay flow path 436 to be longer than the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is four, the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is In three states, even if the second ball enters the inflow port 435 immediately after the first ball dropped from the fan-shaped member 410 enters the winning opening 64 directly, the two Since the change of 1 is completed by the time the ball of the eye enters the winning opening 64, the overflow of the winning opening 64 due to the second ball entering the winning opening 64 can be suppressed. it can.

  A method of assembling the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 (see FIG. 25) to the fixed floor 430 will be described. First, the link member 420 of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the front assembled state is inserted into the hollow portion 433 and the support elongated hole 423 (see FIG. 25) is formed on the support convex portion 434 by the above method. After that, the extension arm 412 (refer to FIG. 25) of the fan-like member 410 is placed on the support groove 432a, and the fan-like member 410 is a support of the fixed floor 430 by inserting the support lid 432b from above. The link member 420 is supported so as to be tiltable at 432 and vertically movable (along the extending direction of the support elongated holes 423). Thereby, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430, and the delay floor device 400 is configured.

  The state change of the delay floor device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 28 (a) is a partial top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a). 28 is a partial top view of the delay bed device 400, and FIG. 28 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delay bed device 400 taken along line XXVIIId-XXVIIId of FIG. 28 (c).

  In the initial state shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are in a parallel posture, and in the tilted state shown in FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d), the fan-shaped members The posture 410 is inclined approximately 45 degrees from the initial state.

  Large differences between the initial state and the tilted state include whether or not a ball can enter the inflow port 435, and whether or not the ball can pass through an intermediate position between the pair of fan-shaped members 410. With regard to the former, in the initial state, a portion of the fan-shaped member 410 is covered on the upper portion of the inflow port 435, so that the ball is incapable of entering the inflow port 435. As the fan-shaped member 410 retreats from the upper portion of the inflow port 435 at (7), the ball can enter the inflow port 435 (as it is tilted to the retreat position).

  As for the latter, in the initial state, the fan-shaped member 410 is in a parallel posture, and the ball is configured to be able to pass through the upper part between the fan-shaped members 410, but in the tilted state, the fan-shaped member 410 is The balls that flow into the portion between the fan-shaped members 410 collide with the fan-shaped members 410 and are prevented from passing. In addition, since the inflow port 435 is disposed between the fan-shaped members 410 in the inclined state, the ball colliding with the fan-shaped member 410 does not bounce back (for example, when it vibrates in the vertical direction) stays in the upper portion of the inflow port 435 In this case, it is possible to drop the ball to the inflow port 435 as it is.

  With reference to FIG. 29, the operation mode of the delay floor device 400 according to the difference in the position when the ball falls from the fixed floor 430 to the front side will be described. Fig.29 (a) is a top view of the delay floor device 400, FIG.29 (b) is sectional drawing of the delay floor device 400 in the XXIXb-XXIXb line | wire of FIG. 29 (a), FIG.29 (c) FIG. 29D is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 29D is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd of FIG. 29C.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), in the delay floor device 400, the movement of the ball when the ball P11 previously riding on the delay floor device 400 falls on the front side of the fixed floor 430. Along (along with the weight of the ball), a fan 410 operates. Therefore, a drive source such as a motor for operating the delay floor device 400 can be eliminated.

  In FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B, the state in which the ball P11 is about to drop from the position away from the fan-shaped member 410 is illustrated, and in FIG. 29C and FIG. The state of falling from the central position of the member 410 to the front side of the fixed floor 430 is illustrated.

  Here, it is also possible to configure the delay floor device 400 to move each time the ball passes above the delay floor device 400, but in this case, the delay floor device 400 does not depend on the way of passing the ball. There is a risk that entry to the winning opening 64 may be unnecessarily delayed. In that case, the start of the change triggered by entering the winning opening 64 is delayed, which causes the player's dissatisfaction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the ball P11 falls on the front side of the fixed floor 430 from the state where the ball P11 rides on the fan-shaped member 410 which is a position where it easily enters the winning opening 64. When the delay floor device 400 is inclined in the lapping state, the ball P11 falls from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410, which is a position where the possibility of entering the winning opening 64 is low even if the ball P11 falls. The delayed floor device 400 is configured in such a way as to maintain its initial state. Therefore, the delay floor device 400 can be operated only when the falling ball P11 is likely to enter the winning opening 64.

  As a result, the delay floor device 400 acts only when it is not necessary, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary delay in entering the ball into the winning opening 64, so entering the winning opening 64 as a trigger. It is possible to avoid delaying the start of the fluctuation and to improve the player's interest.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), the chamfered portion 411a is formed at the tip of the fan-shaped member 410, whereby the tip of the fan-shaped member 410 is projected from the front of the game board 13 in the initial state, In the state, it can be configured in such a manner as to be drawn backward more than the front face of the game board 13. As a result, the ball can be dropped after rolling to a position where it is easy to drop the winning opening 64 (the front side of the front surface of the game board 13), so the ball dropped from the state of FIG. The probability of entering the winning opening 64 can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 30, the relationship between the ball P11 riding on the delay floor device 400 and the ball P12 newly entered on the delay floor device 400 will be described. Fig.30 (a) is a top view of the delay floor device 400, FIG.30 (b) is sectional drawing of the delay floor device 400 in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of FIG. 30 (a).

  In FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the ball P11 flows down to the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, and after the fan-shaped member 410 is inclined, the ball P12 is inserted from the left and right. Ru.

  A predetermined ball reaches the center of the floor portion arranged above the winning opening 64, and another ball rolls on the floor portion from the left and right direction at a timing that it is about to fall to the winning opening 64 and collides with the predetermined ball In some cases, a predetermined ball may come off the winning opening 64, causing a reduction in the player's interest.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when the ball P21 rolls at timing when the ball P11 falls from the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, the delay floor device 400 is in a tilted state. The collision of the ball P12 with the fan-shaped member 410 can prevent the ball P11 from being collided with the ball P12.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 30A, the gap formed by the tip portions of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 is tapered in the traveling direction of the ball P12 (rightward in FIG. 30A). Therefore, even if the ball P12 rolls on a position slightly offset in the front-rear direction from the middle part of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 and collides with the fan-shaped member 410, the velocity direction of the ball P12 is paired along the tapered shape of the gap. It can be corrected in the direction towards the intermediate position of the sector 410 of the Therefore, the rolling path of the ball P12 can be limited, and collision between the ball P12 and the ball P11 can be easily avoided.

  Then, referring to FIG. 31, two balls P11 and P12 enter the delay floor device 400 at an interval, and the delay floor device 400 in a state in which the reciprocating motion is repeated and the velocity in the left-right direction converges to zero. The action of

  31 (a) is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 31 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 along line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 31 (c) 31 (d) is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 31 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 along line XXXId-XXXId in FIG. 31 (c).

  In FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the delay floor device 400 is in the initial state, and the ball P11 is on the near fan 410 and the ball P12 is on the far fan 410. 31 (c) and 31 (d), the ball P11 flows downward to the front side from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), and the delay floor device 400 is inclined. .

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), the ball P12 on the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side flows down from the fan-shaped member 410 on the near side and the delay floor device 400 is in an inclined state. As a result, along the inclination of the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side, it is pushed back in the back direction (the right direction in FIG. 31B).

  Thereafter, the ball P11 falls, and the delay floor device 400 returns to the initial state, so that the ball P12 is again allowed to roll over the delay floor device 400 to the upper side of the front fan 410. . That is, compared with the case where the ball P11 and the ball P12 enter the winning opening 64 continuously from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), the ball P12 is pushed back by an amount equal to that of the ball P11 and the ball P12. It can be spaced apart. As a result, when the ball P11 and the ball P12 enter the winning opening 64, an occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64 can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, two balls P11 and P12 enter the delay floor device 400 and repeat the reciprocating operation, respectively, and in the state in which the speed in the left and right direction converges to 0, the balls P11 and P12 move in the front and back direction The operation of the delay bed device 400 when arranged in series will be described.

  32 (a) is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 32 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and FIG. 32 is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 32 (d) is a front view of the delay floor device 400 in the direction of the arrow XXXIId of FIG. 32 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), when two balls P11 and P12 are arranged in series, the ball P11 is on the front side of the extending arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side ( In the state of being disposed on the left side of FIG. 32 (b), the sphere P12 is disposed in the vicinity of the intermediate position of the pair of front and rear fan-shaped members 410 (see FIG. 32 (b)).

  In this state, when the ball P11 falls from the front side of the delay floor device 400 and the delay floor device 400 is in a tilted state, the ball P12 is moved to the tip of the fan-like member 410 when it rises Can be lifted. In the present embodiment, since the tip end portion of the fan-shaped member 410 has an arc shape, the tip end portion of the fan-shaped member 410 supporting the ball P12 inclines downward toward the outer side in the lateral direction in the inclined state (FIG. 32 (d)) reference). Therefore, the ball P12 does not continue to be maintained at the left and right center of the fan-shaped member 410, but flows down to the left and right outside along the shape of the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410. Thereby, the ball P12 flows from the fan-shaped member 410 into the inlet 435. Therefore, it can be prevented that the ball P12 continues to the ball P11 and enters the winning opening 64.

  FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross-sectional views of the delay floor device 400 taken along line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (c). In FIG. 33 (a), the state in which the balls P11 and P12 are flowing downward from the state shown in FIG. 32 (c) is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the ball P11, A state in which the ball P12 flows down and the ball P11 enters the winning opening 64 is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), when the balls P11 and P12 flow down one after the other on the delay floor device 400, the ball P11 falls on the front side of the game board 13, and the ball P12 is delayed. The flow path 436 flows down. That is, since the flow-down path of the two balls P11 and P12 is separated, and the delay floor device 400 is constituted by a long flow path, the timing at which the two balls P11 and P12 win in the winning opening 64 is shifted. Can.

  Therefore, for example, even if the information is acquired immediately after entering the winning opening 64 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) starts to change, an overflow occurs in the winning opening 64. Can be suppressed.

  That is, from the position of the ball P12 shown in FIG. 33 (b), the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is four in the period until the ball P12 flows down to the winning opening 64 after flowing down the remaining portion of the delay passage 436. By setting the period longer than the fluctuation period (the shortest fluctuation period) which is likely to be selected in the case of the case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the overflow in the winning opening 64.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the distributing device 340 changes the posture only by the movement of the center of gravity has been described, but in the delay device 2300 in the second embodiment, the locking device 2315 disposed in the main body member 2310 is a long hole. It is supported by 2316 and configured to maintain the attitude of the distribution device 2340. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are partial front views of the delay device 2300 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 34 (a), a state in which the ball P21 and the ball P22 are continuously reached to the distributing device 2340 in the initial state is illustrated, and in FIG. 34 (b), the distributing device 2340 is changed by the weight of the ball P21. 34C, the ball P22 releases the locking by the locking device 2315, and the distributing device 2340 is in the initial state. A state in which the movement is started is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the second adjustment device 350 is not disposed in the distribution device 2340, and the distribution device 2340 is biased toward the initial state by a spring mechanism (not shown).

  The distribution device 2340 is configured such that the first wall 2341 is about half the length of the second wall 342. As a result, the collision of the ball P22 flowing down from the third groove 313 and the first wall portion 2341 can be suppressed, and the return operation of the sorting device 2340 can be prevented from being disturbed by the ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the locking device 2315 has a length extending in the left-right direction at the lower end portion of the side wall portion 312e at the wall portion on the back side of the main body member 2310 (the back side in FIG. A weir member 2315a slidably supported in the lateral direction in the long hole 2316, which is a hole, and rotatably supported, and a torsion spring 2315b generating an elastic force for urging the weir member 2315a clockwise in a right direction and a front view. And. In the present embodiment, a space is formed in the lower end portion of the side wall portion 312e, and the wedge member 2315a is configured to be able to pass through the space.

  The wedge member 2315a has a shaft 2315a1 supported by a long hole 2316 extending along the left-right direction in a wall formed between the third grooves 313 extending in a pair at the top and bottom, and its shaft 2315a1 And a contact portion 2315a2 which is formed to project right above (the upper right in FIG. 34) the shaft portion 2315a1 through the side wall portion 312e, and is integrally formed with the shaft portion 2315a1 and And a release portion 2315 a 3 that is configured to protrude inward of the third groove 313 on the side.

  The contact portion 2315 a 2 is disposed at a position that interferes with the movement trajectory of the tip convex portion 342 a of the distribution device 2340. The shape of the contact portion 2315a2 is such that the upper surface portion is steeply lowered as it goes to the right, and the lower surface portion is shaped along the left-right direction (surface contact with the tip convex portion 342a). When the state changes from the initial state to the change state, the resistance applied to the distribution device 2340 can be suppressed and its moving speed can be improved, while when the distribution device 2340 changes the state from the change state to the initial state The distribution device 2340 can be easily locked in a changed state by increasing the resistance applied to the distribution device 2340.

  In addition, since the shaft portion 2315a1 is configured to be slidable in the left and right direction along the long hole 2316, the wedge member 2315a is in the state immediately before the distribution device 2340 is changed (immediately before FIG. 34 (b)). You can escape to the left. As a result, compared to the case where the wedge member 2315a is pivotally supported, the sorting device 2340 can collide with the locking device 2315 and be engaged, thereby preventing malfunction.

  The torsion spring 2315b has a torsion portion wound around the shaft 2315a1 and one end (the end on the left side of FIG. 34 (a)) locked to the main body member 2310 and the other end (FIG. 34 (a)). And the like) is configured in such a manner that the right end) is locked to the wedge member 2315a.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the weight of the ball P21 causes the distributing device 2340 to change, the tip convex portion 342a is locked to the contact portion 2315a2. As a result, the distribution device 2340 is maintained in a changed state. In this embodiment, as long as the locking device 2315 does not change its posture, the distributing device 2340 maintains the changed state.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, the ball P22 flowing down the third groove 313 abuts on the release portion 2315a, so that the posture of the wedge member 2315a changes counterclockwise in a front view, the sorting device 2340 by the wedge member 2315a. (The contact portion 2315a2 is disposed outside the movement trajectory of the distribution device 2340), and the distribution device 2340 can be returned to the initial state.

  According to this, in a state where the urging force in the clockwise direction in a front view is always applied to the distributing device 2340, a time delay from the state change of the distributing device 2340 to the change state to the start of movement toward the initial state is formed. can do. Therefore, the balls P21 and P22 can be reliably distributed to the separate flow paths with a simple configuration.

  Although FIG. 34 describes the case where the balls P21 and P22 flow downward in a row, in light of the fact that the release of the locking device 2315a is caused by the flow of the ball P22, the effect of the present embodiment is as follows. It does not depend on the arrival interval to the distribution device 2340 of

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the delay device 300 is changed by the action of the sphere flowing down the upstream side of the detection port 312d has been described, but the delay device 3300 in the third embodiment is downstream of the detection port 312d. It is configured in such a manner that the state changes due to the action of the flowing sphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection port 312 d is disposed in an aspect having an opening directed in the left-right direction.

  35 (a), 35 (b), 35 (c), 36 (a), 36 (b) and 36 (c) show how the balls P31 and P32 flow in the delay device 3300. It is a partial front view of delay device 3300 in a 3rd embodiment illustrated to a series.

  35 (a) shows the state in which the stopping device 3340 is in the initial state and the balls P31 and P32 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the stopping device 3340, and FIG. 35 (b) Then, a state in which the stopping device 3340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 35 (a) is illustrated, and in FIG. 35 (c), a state in which the stopping device 3340 is changed is illustrated.

  Further, FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the previous ball P31 passes through the detection port 312d in the left-right direction and abuts on the maintenance device 3360 to change the posture of the maintenance device 3360. In the state shown in FIG. 36 (c), the stop device 3340 is changed in attitude from the change state to the initial state, leaving a space where only one ball can pass between it and the second groove 3312. A state in which P32 flows downward toward the detection port 312d is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the delay device 3300 has a body member 3310 having a flow-down path for guiding the ball entering the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the ball flowing down the inside of the body member 3310. When the stopping device 3340 whose state changes due to the action and the stopping device 3340 becomes the changed state (see FIG. 35C), the state is maintained and the posture changes due to the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d Accordingly, the maintenance device 3360 is mainly provided to release the maintenance of the state of the stopping device 3340.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the main body member 3310 forms a downward inclined flow path and guides the ball entering from the winning opening 64 to a position vertically above the detection opening 312d, and its first groove 3311 A second groove 3312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d and a post-detection flow path 3313 in which a ball having passed the detection port 312d is guided are mainly included. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312 are in the shape of a groove having an opening on the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the opening is closed to the game board 13 to allow the passage of balls to flow down. It is formed.

  In the second groove 3312, a side wall portion 312e is extended to the detection port 312d, and an accommodation concave portion 3312f configured as a recess having a size capable of accommodating a half ball between the abutment wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e is formed. Prepare.

  A receiving wall 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall 312e, and a receiving recess 3312c1 is recessed rearward in the receiving wall 3312c. The housing recess 3312c1 is disposed in such a positional relationship that the magnet portion 3346 can be stored when the stopping device 3340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 35A).

  The accommodation recess 3312 f extends along a straight line in which the lower wall surface for receiving the ball passes through the center hole 345 of the stopping device 3340. As a result, the direction in which the ball P32 waiting in the housing recess 3312f starts to flow down due to gravity can be set as the direction directed to the stopping device 3340. Therefore, when the ball P32 is allowed to flow down, the ball P32 can be smoothly flowed down.

  The post-detection flow path 3313 is a flow-down path through which the ball having passed through the detection port 312 d flows down and is disposed directly below the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and supports the shaft portion 3361 a of the maintenance device 3360 And an opening 3313 b which is an opening configured to be able to move in and out of the contact portion 3363 and a main body rod protruding from the upper wall of the flow path 3313 after detection toward the lower side surface of the main body bar 3361 of the retaining device 3360 A locking portion 3313 c for locking movement of 3361 and a delay flow path 3313 d extending from the detection port 312 d to the opening 3313 b are provided.

  The stopping device 3340 does not include the second adjustment device 350 configured to be able to move the center of gravity described in the first embodiment, and the center G3 of the stopping device 3340 extends from the second wall 342 and the stopping device 3340 It is fixedly arranged at the intersection with the circumference of. In the second wall 342, the formation of the tip convex portion 342a is omitted.

  In addition, the stop device 3340 includes a magnet portion 3346 which is extended from the first wall portion 341 of the stop device 3340 to the opposite side of the second wall portion 342 and is made of a magnetic material.

  The maintenance device 3360 is a pendulum-like device rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3313a, and a main body rod 3361 which is a rod-like member having a shaft portion 3361a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 3313a at an intermediate position, A magnet portion 3362 which is disposed at an end portion of the main body rod 3361 close to the receiving wall portion 312 c and is made of a magnetic material, and an attitude of the main body rod 3361 which is disposed at the opposite end portion of the magnet portion 3362 An abutment portion 3363 which is disposed at a position where it can enter into the inside of the flow path 3313 after a change due to a change, and which is disposed so as to be able to abut on the flowing ball.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35A, the posture in which the main body rod 3361 is supported by the locking portion 3313c is the initial state of the maintenance device 3360. That is, in the initial state, the magnet portion 3362 is disposed to face the housing recess 3312 c 1, and the contact portion 3363 is projected to the inside of the flow path 3313 after detection, and the weight of the contact portion 3363 causes the maintenance device 3360 to Posture is maintained.

  The end face of the magnet portion 3362 is a straight line drawn vertically from the end face, and the upper portion of the straight line is omitted from the straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361 a.

  That is, a portion which is an end surface portion and is drawn vertically from the end surface and through which a straight line passes through the shaft portion 3361a is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c in the initial state, and the upper portion thereof Since the portion moving close to the receiving wall 3312c is omitted by rotating counterclockwise, the same portion is the closest to the receiving wall 3312c even after the maintenance device 3360 changes its posture from the initial state (All the portions of the end face of the magnet portion 3362 are configured to be away from the receiving wall portion 3312c).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed by the action of a ball from the state where the magnet part 3346 of the stopping device 3340 approaches the magnet part 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 and the magnetic force in the adsorption direction is generated. Thus, the end face of the magnet portion 3362 can be separated from the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340.

  In addition, since the magnet portion 3362 is configured not to move in a direction perpendicular to the suction surface but to be separated while tilting the posture with respect to the suction surface, adsorption of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 can be performed with a weak force. It can be released.

  A change in the state of the delay device 3300 when the balls P31 and P32 pass through the main body member 3310 will be described in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, when the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P31 and P32 reach the stopping device 3340 by passing through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312. In the present embodiment, since the space between the first wall 341 and the second wall 342 of the stopping device 3340 is sized to accommodate one ball, only the front sphere P31 is accommodated, and the latter is The ball P32 is maintained outside the stop 3340.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the stop device 3340 is rotated from the initial state by the weight of the previous ball P31, and the later ball P32 is pushed by the outer end of the second wall 342 to the receiving recess 3312f. The left part is accommodated. Since the position accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312 f is the lowermost position on the upstream side of the stopping device 3340 of the second groove 3312, the sphere P 32 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 35C, in a state where the ball P31 is made to flow down to the detection port 312d, the first wall portion 341 and the receiving wall portion 3312c of the stopping device 3340 abut each other, and the magnet portion 3346 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312c1. Be done. In this state, the magnet unit 3346 approaches the magnet unit 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 and a magnetic force in the attracting direction is generated, whereby the state of the stopping device 3340 is maintained in a changed state. Therefore, even if the ball P31 flows outward of the stopping device 3340, the ball P32 remains stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), after the previous ball P31 passes through the delay channel 3313d, the body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 is rotated by contacting the contact portion 3363, and the magnet portion 3362 is rotated. It is separated from the magnet part 3346.

  As a result, the magnetic force acting on the stopping device 3340 rapidly decreases, and the force for stopping the rotation of the stopping device 3340 is released, so that the center of gravity G3 of the stopping device 3340 is moved downward by the action of gravity. The stop device 3340 starts rotating counterclockwise in a front view.

  In the present embodiment, since the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the contact portion 3363 is several times (about five times) longer than the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the magnet portion 3362, according to the principle of forceps. The maintenance device 3360 can be rotated with a small load of the weight of the ball P31.

  In addition, since the moving width on the magnet portion 3362 side is smaller than the moving width on the contact portion 3363 side relative to the shaft portion 3361a, the magnet portion 3362 is positioned by the vibration transmitted to the game board 13 It is possible to prevent the position of the stopping device 3340 from changing due to a lack of magnetic force to be applied to the stopping device 3340 due to shifting.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b), the maintenance device 3360 returns to the initial state by the weight of the contact portion 3363 when the ball P31 passes and the ball P31 and the contact portion 3363 are separated.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b), the stopping device 3340 rotates in such a manner that the opening area of the portion facing the ball P32 housed in the housing recess 3312 f gradually increases in the return operation from the change state to the initial state. Do. That is, the ball P32 can be accommodated in the stopping device 3340 before the stopping device 3340 returns to the initial state. Thereby, for example, when two balls are deposited on the upstream side of the stopping device 3340, both of the two balls can be prevented from flowing into the stopping device 3340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop device 3340 from being clogged and causing an operation failure or a slow operation speed.

  As shown in FIG. 36C, the ball P32 housed in the housing recess 3312f is housed in the stopping device 3340, and the weight of the ball P32 rotates the stopping device 3340 so that the ball P32 flows down to the detection port 312d. Be done.

  As described above, even when balls P31 and P32 are in a row and enter the winning opening 64, the above ball P31 changes the posture of the maintaining device 3360 until it passes the position for releasing the state maintaining of the stopping device 3340 , After the flow of the ball P32 can be stopped. In the present embodiment, the ball P31 is designed to pass through the delay channel 3313d in 3 seconds, so the ball P32 passes through the detection port 312d and starts to fluctuate for at least 3 seconds. Can be prevented from passing through the detection port 312d.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35A, when the shortest period of fluctuation obtainable by the ball entering the winning opening 64 (the fluctuation period which is likely to be selected when the number of holding balls is four) is 3 seconds, Even if the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64 in a row and enter the ball (the ball is pitched at an interval shorter than 3 seconds), after the variation started by the ball P31 passing the detection opening 312d ends. The ball P32 can be configured to pass through the detection port 312d. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an overflow when the balls enter the winning opening 64 continuously.

  In addition, since a period from the passage of the ball P31 through the detection port 312d to the change in posture of the maintenance device 3360 can be secured, the overflow of the stop device 3340 in the upstream of the detection port 312d is compared with that in Can be reliably prevented.

  For example, when the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed using a ball before passing through the detection port 312d, the operation of the stop device 3340 in order to secure a space between the ball passing through the detection port 312d and the ball thereafter It should be designed to be slow. That is, it is necessary to provide an interval between the balls in a period from when the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state from the change state, and there is a possibility that the overflow can not be prevented if the operation speed of the stop device 3340 changes due to aging deterioration.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, only the sphere operates in the delay device 3300 after the sphere passes the detection port 312d and before the sphere abuts on the maintenance device 3360. Thus, the operation timing of the stopping device 3340 can be managed in relation to the ball and the fixed flow path.

  In the present embodiment, since the period (3 seconds) for the fluctuation has elapsed while the ball reaches the maintaining device 3360, the overflow is detected regardless of the period until the stopping device 3340 returns to the initial state. It can be prevented. That is, although the stopping device 3340 is about to return to the initial state in 10 seconds, it is about to return to the initial state in 0.5 seconds, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64 regardless of it.

  Further, as compared with the case where the stopping device 3340 is operated by electric constant movement, the ball P31 passes from the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d while ensuring a short period from after the ball P31. It is possible to stop only the ball P32 entering the ball, and it is possible to prevent an extension of a period from when the previous ball P31 passes through the winning opening 64 until the fluctuation is started. In this way, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling discomfort (for example, a feeling that he thinks that he may be doing something wrong because the ball enters the winning opening 64 and the change is not started). it can.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by the action of the convex portion 321a1 of the delay device 300 has been described, but the delay device 4300 in the fourth embodiment decelerates the ball by the sprocket 4340 that separates the balls at equal intervals. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  37 (a), 37 (b), 37 (c), 38 (a), 38 (b) and 38 (c) show how the balls P41, P42, etc. flow through the delay device 4300. It is a front view of delay device 4300 in a 4th embodiment illustrated in a time series. In FIG. 37 (a), the sprocket 4340 is in the initial state and the balls P41 and P42 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the sprocket 4340, and in FIG. 37 (b), A state in which the sprocket 4340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. 37A is illustrated, and in FIG. 37C, a state in which the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 is disposed at the locking position is illustrated. In a), the state in the middle of which the sprocket 4340 rotates due to the weight of the ball P42 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38 (b), the state immediately before the ball P42 enters the detection port 312d is illustrated; The state in which the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise in a front view and the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 moves to the initial position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, the delay device 4300 includes a body member 4310 having a flow-down path for guiding a ball entering the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball flowing down the inside of the body member 4310. It mainly comprises a sprocket 4340 whose state changes by action, and a magnet device 4350 having a magnet member 4351 configured to be relatively movable along the rotation trajectory of the sprocket 4340.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, the main body member 4310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 4312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a second thereof. A cylindrical shaft rod 4313 is provided mainly extending in the front-rear direction at the right portion of the groove 4312. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312 are in the shape of a groove having an opening on the gaming board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the opening is closed to the gaming board 13 to allow the passage of balls to flow down. It is formed.

  The second groove 4312 is configured by removing the receiving wall portion 3312 c (see FIG. 35A) from the second groove 3312 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the contact wall 312a, the concave portion 312b, the detection port 312d, the side wall 312e, and the housing concave portion 3312f are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The sprocket 4340 is a gear-shaped member that is rotated by the weight of a ball flowing down the main body member 4310 and is a disc-shaped disc member 4341 whose center position is rotatably supported by the shaft rod 4313 and its circle An accommodation wall portion 4342 is mainly provided, which extends to the front side of the plate member 4341 and is formed so as to be capable of accommodating a ball in a gap between the walls.

  The disc member 4341 is disposed at a position that is flush with the wall on the back side of the main body member 4310 (the wall on the back side in the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 37A). The passing ball passes the front side of the disc member 4341.

  In addition, the disk member 4341 has stripe magnetic poles along the outer peripheral surface (the region between the plate-like portions 4342a to 4342e is equally divided into three, the central portion thereof is an N pole, and the outer portion is an S pole And a magnetic portion 4341a having a striped magnetic pole). The rotational speed of the sprocket 4340 is adjusted by the interaction between the magnet unit 4341a and the magnet device 4350.

  A triangular mark M is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral position of the disc member 4341 in order to make it easy to determine that the disc member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 have moved relative to each other.

  The housing wall portion 4342 is a plate-like portion radially extended outward in the radial direction from the center of the disk member 4341 and does not allow passage of the ball in the circumferential direction, and is equally spaced (72 ° 5) plate-like parts 4342a to 4342e arranged at intervals. Each gap between the plate-like portions 4342a to 4342e is configured to have a width that can accommodate only one ball. In addition, the outer peripheral surface of each of the plate-like portions 4342 a to 4342 e (the outer peripheral surface in the radial direction of the sprocket 4340) is formed in an arc shape formed coaxially with the central axis of the disk member 4341.

  As exemplarily shown in FIG. 37 (a), the first plate-like portion 4342a is disposed at a position where the ball P41 rides, and from there, clockwise in a front view clockwise, the second plate-like portion 4342b, the third plate-like portion 4342c, a fourth plate-like portion 4342d, and a fifth plate-like portion 4342e are disposed.

  Magnet device 4350 is formed of a magnetic material and is formed in an arc shape having a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the outer peripheral surface of disc member 4341 of sprocket 4340, and shaft rod 4313 via a rotating arm (not shown). The arc wall portion extended from the main body member 4310 at a position separated by a predetermined distance below the disc member 4341 as an arc-shaped wall surface along the shape of the magnet member 4351 and the lower surface of the magnet member 4351 4352 and a stopper 4353 projecting to the side of the magnet member 4351 at an end opposite to the end of the arc wall 4352 that is close to the main body 4310.

  The magnet member 4351 has a stripe-shaped magnetic pole on the inner circumferential side of the arc shape (a stripe magnetic pole in which the area of the arc is equally divided into three, the central portion is the S pole, and the outer portion is the N pole) The sprocket 4340 is disposed with a slight gap from the outer circumferential surface of the disc member 4341 and is positionally corrected in relation to the magnetic pole of the disc member 4341.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 37A (the state before the weight of the ball P41 is applied to the sprocket 4340), the central position of the region between the plate-like portions 4342a to 4342e and the central position of the arc of the magnet member 4351 And are maintained at the matching position.

  One end (the end on the left side of FIG. 37 (a)) abuts on the outer surface of the main body member 4310 at the initial position shown in FIG. 37 (a), and the magnet member 4351 is engaged as shown in FIG. The other end (upper end in FIG. 37C) abuts against the stopper portion 4353 at the stop position (position rotated counterclockwise from the initial position by 72 ° from the initial position around the shaft 4313).

  The arc wall portion 4352 is a wall portion disposed outside the magnet member 4351 and is disposed at a position where a gap is formed between the magnet member 4351 and the magnet member 4351 when the magnet member 4351 is adsorbed to the disc member 4341. Be done.

  For example, even if the game board 13 vibrates and an impact is applied to the magnet member 4351 for some reason, even if the adsorption between the disc member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 is temporarily released, the magnet member 4351 is an arc. Since it is supported by the wall portion 4352, the magnet member 4351 can be prevented from being largely displaced.

  The stopper portion 4353 is disposed at a position where the movement of the magnet member 4351 is blocked. In the present embodiment, the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 abut each other in a locked state in which the magnet member 4351 is rotated by a predetermined angle (72 ° in this embodiment) from the initial position shown in FIG. In this locked state, the ball P41 flows down to the detection port 312d.

  The change in the state of the delay device 4300 when the balls P41 and P42 pass through the main body member 4310 will be described in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, when the balls P41 and P42 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P41 and P42 reach the sprocket 4340 by passing through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312. In the present embodiment, since the space between the first plate-like portion 4342a and the second plate-like portion 4342b of the sprocket 4340 is sized to accommodate one ball, only the front ball P41 is accommodated, and the rear Ball P42 is maintained on the outside of the sprocket 4340.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the sprocket 4340 is rotated from the initial state (see FIG. 37 (a)) by the weight of the previous ball P41, and the subsequent ball P42 is pushed to the tip of the second plate 4342b. As a result, the left portion is accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312 f. Since the position accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312 f is the lowermost position of the second groove 4312 on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the sphere P 42 is maintained by the action of gravity at the position shown in FIG. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (b), the magnet member 4351 moves integrally with the disc member 4341 of the sprocket 4340. Therefore, the weight of the magnet member 4351 is loaded on the disc member 4341 as a rotational resistance.

  As shown in FIG. 37C, the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 are in a state where the sprocket 4340 is rotated 72 ° counterclockwise in a front view from the initial state (a state in which the ball P31 can flow down to the detection port 312d). Are in contact (the magnet member 4351 is placed in the locking position).

  Therefore, when the sprocket 4340 further rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the magnet member 4351 is maintained at the locking position, and only the sprocket 4340 is rotated. In this case, a magnetic force acts between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 and the magnetic force is added to the resistance of the rotation of the sprocket 4340.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37C, in a state where the ball P41 flows down to the detection port 312d while rubbing against the side wall portion 312e and the first plate-like portion 4342a, the sprocket 4340 is rotated by 72 ° from the initial state. It becomes. That is, by passing the ball, the sprocket 4340 is adjusted to a predetermined posture. Because the shape of the ball is made precisely, it is possible to reliably rotate the sprocket 4340 by 72 ° using the precision of the shape of the ball.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 37C, since the first plate-like portion 4342a inclines downward in the direction of pressing the ball P41 against the side wall portion 312e, the velocity of the ball P41 is directed in the direction approaching the side wall portion 312e. It is possible to prevent the first plate-like portion 4342a from rotating too much by the force of the ball P41.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37C, the ball P42 enters the sprocket 4340, and after the ball P41 is thrown toward the detection port 312d, the weight of the ball P42 causes the sprocket 4340 to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P42, as shown by the position of the mark M, the disk member 4341 of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 move relative to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force generated between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is loaded on the sprocket 4340 as a rotational resistance.

  Further, in FIG. 38A, the ball P43 and the ball P44 enter the winning opening 64 subsequently to the ball P42, and the state where the ball P43 and the ball P44 stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340 is illustrated.

  In this embodiment, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the magnetic force applied between the magnet member 4351 and the sprocket 4340 is much larger than the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the weight of the magnet member 4351. It is configured in an aspect (the magnet member 4351 is configured in such a manner that the weight is reduced while the generated magnetic force is increased).

  Thus, for example, while the period from the state shown in FIG. 37A to the state shown in FIG. 37C is 0.5 seconds, the period shown in FIG. The period until the state shown in) can be set to 5 seconds (the period required to rotate the sprocket 4340 by a predetermined angle can be changed).

  In the present embodiment, since the period from the state shown in FIG. 37C to the state shown in FIG. 38A is set to 5 seconds, for example, the sphere P41 passes through the detection port 312d. As a result, when the number of holding balls in the winning opening 64 is four, and the variation selected at that time is a variation for 3 seconds, the configuration is such that the sphere P42 passes the detection aperture 312d after the variation ends. Since the ball P42 passes through the detection opening 312d, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an overflow at the winning opening 64.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when a plurality of balls P43 and balls P44 stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the load applied from the balls P43 and balls P44 to the sprocket 4340 is the outer periphery of the housing wall 4342. The load in the direction (radial direction) directed to the shaft rod 4313 is determined by the effect of the surface shape (arc).

  Therefore, the load exerted from the ball P43 and the ball P44 in the rotational direction of the sprocket 4340 can be limited to the load generated by the friction between the ball P43 and the sprocket 4340, compared to the weight of the staying ball P43 and the ball P44. Thus, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 38 (b), the ball P42 is thrown to the detection port 312d and the ball P43 enters the sprocket 4340 (from the initial state shown in FIG. 37 (a)). The rotated state is illustrated.

  When the sprocket 4340 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b), relative movement between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is involved as in the case where the weight of the ball P42 rotates the sprocket 4340. The same applies to the case where the ball P44 after the ball P43 is accommodated in the sprocket 4340 and the sprocket 4340 rotates.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the number of balls entering the winning opening 64 is four or more (the number of balls does not depend on the number of balls), the interval for sending each ball to the detection opening 312d is constant. The interval until the ball P41 entering the winning opening 64 as the first ball can pass through the detection opening 312d can be maintained at a distance, as compared with the throwing distance between the balls opened by the sprocket 4340. It can be shortened.

  Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player feels a sense of discomfort (for example, a feeling that he thinks that something is wrong is made because the ball enters the winning opening 64 and the change is not started). .

  As shown in FIG. 38C, after the ball P44 (see FIG. 38B) is directed toward the detection opening 312d, the next ball (the ball entering the winning opening 64) is transmitted to the sprocket 4340. When not riding, the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise in a front view by the weight of the magnet member 4351.

  In the present embodiment, since the magnet member 4351 is formed of a light member, the rotational speed of the sprocket 4340 is reduced, and the period for the magnet member 4351 to return from the locking position to the initial position is 5 seconds.

  Therefore, when the ball P41 shown in FIG. 37 (a) passes through the detection port 312d and the sprocket 4340 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 38 (c) and the magnet member 4351 is arranged at the initial position An interval of 5 seconds or more is made between the time when the entering ball passes through the detection port 312d. Five seconds is a period longer than the shortest fluctuation period (three seconds) which is likely to be selected when the number of balls held by the winning opening 64 is four.

  Therefore, when the ball passes the sprocket 4340 immediately after the sprocket 4340 returns to the initial state, the occurrence of the overflow at the winning opening 64 can be easily prevented.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38 (c), the relative position between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 does not change in appearance from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), but as shown in FIG. As compared with the state shown in (a), the magnet member 4351 is disposed at a position relatively moved by 72 ° centering on the shaft rod 4313.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the magnet member 4351 is disposed at the locking position, the sprocket 4340 can move relative to the magnet member 4351 between the plate-like portions of the housing wall portion 4342 every time the ball passes through the second groove 4312. It is configured in such a manner as to be displaced by an angle (that is, 72 °) for one gap.

  Therefore, the relative movement between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is, for example, a relative movement such that the first plate portion 4342a moves to the position of the second plate state 4342b, and after the relative movement, the sprocket 4340 and The overall shape combined with the magnet member 4351 does not change from before relative movement.

  Therefore, regardless of the number of balls passing through the second groove 4312, the overall shape of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 after the balls are discharged from the sprocket 4340 can be unchanged, so that the winning opening 64 can be obtained. It is not necessary to provide a device for moving the magnet member 4351 to the position of the mark M of the sprocket 4340 when the inflow of balls to the ball is lost for a certain period of time (shown in FIG. 38C). Thus, even if the relative positional relationship between the mark M and the magnet member 4351 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), it can be left as it is.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the second groove 3312 when the stopping device 3340 is in the changing state also passes through the stopping device 3340 and is discharged through the flow path 3313 after detection, but the fifth embodiment The delay device 5300 in is configured in such a way that the balls flowing down the second groove 5312 flow down the continuous passage groove 5314 when the stopping device 3340 is in the changing state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the delay device 5300 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 39, balls P51 to P54 are continuously entered into the first winning opening 64, and as a result, a state in which the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state is illustrated. Further, since the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the delay device 5300 are configured as a device having a symmetrical shape with the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the third embodiment The description is omitted for the parts overlapping with the description in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the delay device 5300 has a body member 5310 having a flow-down path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d and the action of the ball flowing down the inside of the body member 5310 When the stop device 3340 changes its state and the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and the stop is caused by the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. A maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the device 3340, and a retention device 5500 for acting on a ball flowing down a continuous passage groove 5314 to be described later and retaining the ball are mainly provided. In addition, about the retention apparatus 5500, in order to make an understanding easy, only the movable plate part 5510 is shown and illustration of another structure is abbreviate | omitted, About the movable plate part 5510, it can visually recognize through the retention part 5314b by a plain view. The part is illustrated by a solid line, and the other part is illustrated by a hidden line (broken line). Further, the rotational resistance of the stopping device 3340 and the position of the center of gravity G3 are set in such a manner that it takes about 1 second from the changing state to the initial state of the stopping device 3340.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main body member 5310 forms a downward inclined flow path and guides the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 up to a position vertically above the detection opening 312d, and the first groove 5311 A second groove 5312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, a post-detection flow path 5313 in which a ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and an intermediate position of the second groove 5312 And a continuous passage groove 5314 formed as a groove branched to the side (the right side in FIG. 39).

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the after-detection flow path 5313 and the continuous passage groove 5314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is in the game board 13 in the assembled state. By being closed, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312 and the post-detection flow passage 5313 have the same configuration as the third embodiment (the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312 and the post-detection flow passage 3313) and a symmetrical shape. Since the configuration is the same as that of the third embodiment, the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  The second groove 5312 is disposed to face the recess 312b (in other words, it is a wall extending to the front side in the vicinity of the left end of the recess 312b and extending in the vertical direction) The portion 312e is extended to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 5314 is disposed between the abutment wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e to form a branch passage capable of throwing a ball.

  The position where the continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the second groove 5312 is formed the same as the position where the accommodation recess 3312 f is disposed in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball that has reached the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 35A) (a ball that has entered at the beginning of the balls P51 to P54, ie, the ball P51). Is guided to the detection port 312d while rotating the stopping device 3340 in a changing state, and the ball reached the stopping device 3340 when the stopping device 3340 is in a changing state (see FIG. 39) The balls P52 to P54) flow down the continuous passage groove 5314.

  A receiving wall 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall 312e, and a receiving recess 3312c1 is recessed rearward in the receiving wall 3312c. The housing recess 3312 c 1 is disposed in such a positional relationship that the magnet portion 3346 can be stored when the stopping device 3340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 39).

  The post-detection flow path 5313 has the same configuration as the post-detection flow path 3313 of the third embodiment, since it has the left-right symmetric shape. That is, the post-detection flow path 5313 is a flow-down path through which the ball having passed through the detection port 312 d flows down and is disposed directly below the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and supports the shaft portion 3361 a of the maintenance device 3360 Portion 3313a, an opening 3313b which is an opening configured to be able to move in and out the contact portion 3363, and a projection from the upper wall of the flow path 5313 after detection toward the lower surface of the main body bar 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 A locking portion 3313c for locking the movement of the main body rod 3361 and a delay flow path 3313d extending from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b are provided.

  As in the third embodiment, the delay channel 3313 d is designed to have a length such that a sphere flowing down by the action of gravity passes for at least 3 seconds or more. Therefore, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changing state for at least 3 seconds, and the ball that has entered during that time can be continuously entered into the continuous passage groove 5314.

  In this case, the stop device 3340 changes the state when the ball P51 entering the first winning opening 64 changes its state toward the change state (the start of the period in which the ball can be introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314) and the change state. And a period of time to maintain

  The period of maintaining this change state (at least 3 seconds after the change of the stop device 3340) and the time for the stop device 3340 to return from the change state to the initial state (about 1 second in this embodiment) are added together. During the above period, the ball having entered the first winning opening 64 can be easily passed continuously through the second detection port 5314 c disposed downstream of the continuous passage groove 5314.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the plurality of balls P51 and P52 enter the first winning opening 64 without requiring the transition of the gaming state, they are the same for the detection opening 312d and the second detection opening 5314c. Switching between a state in which it is easy to pass to a certain extent (a state in which alternate winning is performed) and a state in which it is easy to pass through the second detection port 5314c compared with the detection port 312d Can.

  Generally, the ball firing interval allowed for the pachinko machine 10 is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, so in 3 seconds, the upper limit of balls that can normally enter is 4 or 5 balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of spheres entering in 3 seconds is 5 spheres (ignoring the possibility of entering spheres after the sixth sphere), and the description will be made.

  The continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the second groove 5312 and the introduction groove 5314a into which the ball is first introduced, and the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a and a predetermined number of balls (one ball in this embodiment) A second detecting port 5314c is provided immediately under the holding portion 5314b to be held, a through hole disposed immediately below the holding portion 5314b and through which the ball can pass, and is connected to an intermediate position of the introduction groove 5314a A branch flow channel 5314d disposed on the back side of the introduction groove 5314a, and a third detection port 5314e disposed in the branch flow channel 5314d and provided with a through hole through which the sphere can pass, and detecting passage of the sphere Prepare mainly.

  The introduction groove 5314a is a groove that descends and inclines to the right in a front view as a whole and is bent near the lower end position and extends vertically downward, assuming that a plurality of balls stay from the lower end, An upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is formed in a region on the back side of the third ball counting from the lower end, having a size allowing the passage of the ball and passing through the upper end of the branch flow channel 5314d.

  As described above, the upper end of the branch flow passage 5314 d is connected to the upper limit discharge hole 5314 a 1. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is guided to the branch flow passage 5314d and is detected by passing through the third detection port 5314e. The branch flow channel 5314 d is illustrated as a hidden line (broken line) in order to facilitate understanding of being disposed on the back side of the introduction groove 5314 a.

  On the other hand, the ball which has flowed down the introduction groove 5314a is detected by passing through the second detection port 5314c via the retaining portion 5314b. Therefore, the sphere introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314 is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown) after being detected in either the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the introduction groove 5314a is set in such a manner that it takes at least 2 seconds or more when the ball flows down the introduction groove 5314a by the action of gravity. Therefore, it is possible to reliably shift the passage timing of the sphere P51 passing the stopping device 3340 vertically downward and passing the detection port 312d and the sphere P52 flowing down the introduction groove 5314a and passing the second detection port 5314c. it can.

  For example, when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (FIG. 35A), when two balls (balls P51 and P52) enter the first winning opening 64 in a row, the head ball P51 is the stop device It flows down vertically downward while changing the state of 3340 from the initial state to the changed state, and passes through the detection port 312d immediately after changing the state of the stopping device 3340. On the other hand, the trailing ball P52 rolls on the arc wall portion 343 of the stopping device 3340 and is introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314, and flows down the introduction groove 5314a for at least 2 seconds, and then the second detection port 5314c. Pass through.

  In the present embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a has a longer flow path length than the delay flow path 3313d (see FIG. 39), but the time required for the sphere to pass through the delay flow path 3313d is longer than that of the delay flow path 3313d. The time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is shorter. This is because the inclination angle of the introduction groove 5314a with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the delay flow path 3313d with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The time required for the stop device 3340 to change from the initial state to the change state is set so short that it can be ignored (about 0.1 seconds), and until the ball whose state is changed in the stop device 3340 passes the detection port 312d When the length of the side wall portion 312e is set in such a manner that the time required for the movement is extremely short (about 0.1 seconds), the timing when the ball P51 is detected by passing the detection port 312d It is possible to shift the timing of detection by passing through the detection port 5314c.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the path length from the first winning hole 64 to the second detection port 5314c is smaller than the path length from the first winning hole 64 to the detection port 312d. It is set long. Thus, visually, the first winning opening 64 passes more than the time required for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to pass through the first winning opening 64 and the detection opening 312 d. It can be determined that the time required to pass through the second detection port 5314c is longer.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 passes the detection opening 312 d or the second detection opening 5314 c (also referred to as start winning or entering the ball; the same applies in other embodiments). Using it as a trigger, variable display of the first special symbol (the first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37, and the ball passes the third detection port 5314e, so that the normal symbol (the second symbol) Variable display is performed. In other words, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64, it is still displayed in a fluctuating manner until it passes the detection sensor (the detecting opening 312d, the first winning opening switch not shown, etc. in the first embodiment). Is not executed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the ball enters the second winning opening 640 (start winning), and the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second Due to the turning on of the winning opening switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for the jackpot of the second special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. Also, this display is similarly performed in other embodiments unless otherwise described in detail.

  Here, the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the present embodiment (common to the first embodiment) will be described. That is, when the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 (in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol) and when the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 (in the case of the second winning special symbol) The probability of being a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is the case where the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 (big hit of the second special symbol) to the first winning opening 64 It is set higher than when the ball wins (the first special symbol jackpot).

  In the following, the detection port where the detection sensor is disposed may be simply referred to as a detection port (or a winning opening, a ball entry port, etc.) (the description of the detection sensor may be omitted), and the ball detects It omits the statement that the lottery is done (fluctuation is executed) due to passing through the mouth (or the winning opening, the entrance, etc.), the ball is simply the detection opening (or the winning opening, It may be simplified and described as passing through a ball entrance etc.).

  While the data of the first symbol acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c can be stored up to four (can be stored sequentially in the four holding areas), the number of stored Can independently acquire the data of the second symbol at the timing when the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of times of holding of the first winning opening 64 (the detection opening 312d and the second detection opening 5314c) and the second winning opening 640. Along with being (simultaneously), the first symbol holding mark as a decorative display indicating the number of holding times is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The first symbol holding mark is displayed simultaneously with the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Therefore, for example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the ball detects the detection opening 312d or the second When the detection port 5314c is passed, the display of the first symbol holding mark is started. Also, this display start is similarly performed in the other embodiments.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the game state (normally, even in a definite change, even during a short time), the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to be a win with a probability of about 1/1. Ru. Therefore, when the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e, the motorized role piece 640a is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 2). be able to.

  In order to throw the ball toward the third detection port 5314e, it is sufficient to enter the ball frequently to the first winning opening 64 as described later, so to the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) The player who aims to enter the ball can be motivated to enter the ball in the first winning opening 64 frequently.

  On the other hand, as described later, when the frequency is reduced and the first winning opening 64 enters, the ball passes not the third detection opening 5314e but the detection opening 312d or the second detection opening 5314c. Therefore, the player adjusts the ball entering frequency to the first winning opening 64, thereby changing the first symbol with the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or changing the second symbol. Can be selected.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, before the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is always started, and the variation display is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, it is possible to solve the problem that there is a possibility that the timing at which the variation display of the normal symbol is started may be overlooked because the display of the third symbol display device 81 is too quiet. In addition, by performing variable display of the first special symbol together with the variable display of the normal symbol, it is possible to improve the attention to the variable display as compared to the case of performing only the variable display of the normal symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B indicates (at the same time) the number of holding times of the passing number of the through gates 67 (simultaneously), a decoration indicating the number of holding times in the third symbol display device 81 The second symbol holding mark is displayed as a visual display.

  Next, the retaining portion 5314b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a partially enlarged front view of the continuous passage groove 5314. As shown in FIG. In addition, in order to make an understanding easy, illustration of the branch flow path 5314 d and the retention device 5500 is omitted.

  The stopping portion 5314b is a hole-like incomplete flow passage in which the wall portion on the back side (the back side in FIG. 40) is removed and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is formed from a pair of plates extending in the vertical direction A ball storage plate portion 5314b1, an upper end long hole 5314b2 which is a through hole extending in the left-right direction at the upper end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 and penetrating in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 40) The lower end portion 5314b1 mainly includes a lower end long hole 5314b3 which is a through hole extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the upper end long hole 5314b2 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  In the ball storage plate portion 5314b1, the length in the vertical direction is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter R of the ball. Therefore, in the retaining portion 5314 b formed by the ball storage plate portion 5314 b 1, the number of balls that can be retained at one time is limited to one.

  The upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 have the extension lengths set equal, while the left and right end positions are shifted in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the upper end long hole 5314b2 is disposed in such a manner that the center position in the left-right direction coincides with the front end right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2. That is, the right end portion of the upper end long hole 5314b2 is disposed at a position separated from the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 by a half length H1 of the total length of the upper end long hole 5314b2. Therefore, the left end of the upper end long hole 5314b2 is from the left end of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the left, from the length H1 to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of a pair of plates It is placed at a position apart by a length obtained by subtracting a width length HR slightly longer than R.

  On the other hand, the lower end long hole 5314b3 is disposed in such a manner that the center position in the left-right direction coincides with the left end of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2 in a front view. That is, the left end portion of the lower end long hole 5314b3 is disposed at a position separated leftward from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 by the length H1. Therefore, the right end of the lower end long hole 5314b3 is from the right end of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right, from the length H1 to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of a pair of plates It is placed at a position apart by a length obtained by subtracting a width length HR slightly longer than R. That is, the right end positions of the upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 are separated in the left-right direction by the width HR, and the left end positions of the upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 are similarly width HR Only separate in the left and right direction.

  Similar to the introduction groove 5314a, the gaming board 13 is disposed on the front side of the retaining portion 5314b in an assembled state. Thereby, since the opening on the front side is closed by the game board 13, a groove shape is formed in which passage of the ball is restricted except for the opening on the back side and the upper and lower openings.

  The remaining back side opening is closed by the movable plate portion 5510 (see FIG. 39) which is slidably supported by the upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 so that the passage of balls is prevented except for the upper and lower openings. Configure a restricted flow path shape. Hereinafter, the retention device 5500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the retention device 5500, and FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the retention device 5500 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIb of FIG. 41 (a). As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the retaining device 5500 includes a movable plate portion 5510 slidably supported by the retaining portion 5314b in the assembled state, and a driving force for operating the movable plate portion 5510. Mainly includes a driving device 5520 for generating the driving force, a rod-like transmission member 5530 for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving device 5520 to the movable plate portion 5510, and a detection device 5540 for detecting the position of the transmission member 5530. .

  The movable plate portion 5510 includes a main body plate portion 5511 formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper extending plate 5512 and a lower extending plate which are vertically extended from the main body plate portion 5511 to the front side. 5513 and a connecting projection 5514 which is provided to project from the rear surface of the main body plate 5511 to the transmission member 5530.

  The upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 have a length H1 in the left-right direction and a dimension (thickness) in the vertical direction shorter than the vertical width dimension of the upper long hole 5314b2, and the dimension in the front-rear direction (extension length Is formed as a thin plate having a length such that the distance from the game board 13 is less than the diameter R in the assembled state. Further, the upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 are disposed parallel to each other, and the left and right end portions are shifted left and right by the width HR.

  The driving device 5520 is a rotationally driven driving motor 5521 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) and a disk shape that rotates with the rotation of the driving motor 5521 and transmits the driving force to the transmission member 5530. And a base member 5523 which is a base-like member fixed to the game board 13 and to which the case of the drive motor 5521 is fastened and fixed.

  The rotary disk 5522 is cylindrically convex toward the transmission member 5530 from a position where the drive shaft 5521a of the drive motor 5521 is inserted and fixed at the center of the circle and is separated from the center of the circle by the width length HR. A transmission convex portion 5522 a is provided.

  The base member 5523 is a flat surface whose upper surface is formed substantially horizontally, extends upward from the upper surface, and includes a plurality of holding portions 5523a which hold the first rod portion 5531 from the front and rear in the assembled state.

  The sandwiching portion 5523a is a plurality of rib-like portions which are arranged in parallel and spaced apart in the front-rear direction by the front-rear width dimension of the first rod portion 5531 and which are dotted on a straight line facing left and right. Two each are disposed in front of and behind the rod portion 5531. Thus, the transmission member 5530 can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction, and the sliding effect in the left-right direction can be facilitated by the guiding effect.

  The transmission member 5530 is an L-shaped member extending in the left-right direction and the up-down direction starting from the lower right portion in a front view, and is a rod-like portion mounted on the flat upper surface of the base member 5523 A first rod portion 5531 connected to the movable plate portion 5510 at the end portion of the second rod portion, a rod-shaped second rod portion 5532 extending vertically upward from the other end portion of the first rod portion 5531, and The two rod portions 5532 are penetrated in the front-rear direction, and a long connecting hole 5533 in the form of a long hole in the vertical direction is mainly provided.

  The first rod portion 5531 is supported on the flat upper surface of the base member 5523 so as to be movable in the left and right direction along the flat upper surface, and one end of the first rod portion 5531 can receive the connecting projection 5514 of the movable plate 5510. It mainly includes a receiving recess 5531 a recessed in the part and a detected portion 5531 b protruding toward the detection device 5540 side (upper side) at an intermediate position in the left-right direction length.

  The receiving recess 5531a has a substantially equal length in the left-right direction (or a slightly longer length) in comparison with the dimension of the connecting protrusion 5514, and allows some rattling in the vertical dimension (a gap is formed). The length is taken.

  This suppresses positional deviation in the left-right direction between the receiving concave portion 5531a and the connecting convex portion 5514, and causes a positional deviation in the vertical direction when a load is applied from the connecting convex portion 5514 to the receiving concave portion 5531a. , Can release the load.

  Here, in the case where the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are formed by integral molding, positional deviation in the left-right direction does not occur, but it becomes difficult to release the load, so the durability tends to be low. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by forming the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 as separate members, it is possible to improve the durability against the load while suppressing the positional deviation in the left-right direction.

  In the present embodiment, the vertical position of the movable plate portion 5510 does not change due to the drive of the drive device 5520. Therefore, even if positional deviation in the vertical direction between the connecting convex portion 5514 and the receiving concave portion 5531a is allowed, It does not affect the performance (function of sliding the movable plate 5510 to the left and right and opening or closing the channel) to be described later.

  The connecting elongated hole 5533 has an extending length in the vertical direction equal to or larger than twice the width length HR, and can receive and connect the transmission convex portion 5522 a of the driving device 5520. As the arrangement of the transmission convex portion 5522a changes with the rotation of the rotary disk 5522, the arrangement of the connecting long hole 5533 connected thereto changes, whereby the transmission member 5530 slides (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 43).

  The detection means 5540 is a sensor for detecting the support member 5541 fixed to the base member 5523 and the side (lower side) where the detection groove faces the first rod portion 5531 and is a front view of the support member 5541 A first sensor 5542 fixed to the right end and a second sensor 5543 which is the same type of sensor as the first sensor 5542 and fixed to the left end of the support member 5541 in the same posture and in the same posture are mainly included.

  The first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are transmission type sensors including a light emitter and a light receiver, which are disposed opposite to each other with the detected portion 5531 b interposed therebetween, and detect the detected portion 5531 b sliding in the left and right direction. That is, by arranging the detection target portion 5531b between the light emitter and the light receiver (arranged in the back and forth direction at the lower end position in FIG. 41A), the light emitted from the light emitter toward the light receiver is blocked. The detected portion 5531b is detected by the first sensor 5542 or the second sensor 5543.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, an operation aspect of the retaining device 5500 will be described. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a) and 43 (b) are front views of the retention portion 5314b and the retention device 5500. FIG. In FIGS. 42 and 43, the main plate portion 5511 of the movable plate portion 5510 disposed so as to overlap the plate portion on the back side (the rear side of the paper surface of FIG. 42) of the plate portion constituting the outer shape of the continuous passage groove 5314. Are simply illustrated in solid lines, including the overlapping portions.

  In FIG. 42 (a), the rotating disc 5522 is in the initial phase (both closed state of the retaining device 5500), and in FIG. 42 (b), the rotating disc 5522 is clockwise in a front view from the initial phase. In FIG. 43 (a), the rotating disk 5522 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in a front view from the second phase in the state (second open state of the retaining device 5500) in which the second phase at the time of 90 degrees of rotation In FIG. 43 (b), the third phase at the time point (the both closed state of the retaining device 5500) is the fourth phase when the rotating disc 5522 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in a front view from the third phase. The states (lower open state of retaining device 5500) are respectively illustrated.

  The displacements in the states shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a) and 43 (b) occur at equal time intervals, and from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) When time passes further, the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) is restored. That is, changes in the states illustrated in FIGS. 42A, 42B, 43A, and 43B are repeated at regular intervals after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the present embodiment, the drive motor 5521 is controlled at an operation speed at which the rotary disk 5522 makes one rotation in about 6 seconds.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 42 (a), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed to the upper extension plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is smaller than the diameter of the ball). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches above the retaining portion 5314b in the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), entering of the ball P52 into the retaining portion 5314b is restricted. The lower opening of the retaining portion 5314b is also closed to the lower extension plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is smaller than the diameter of the ball).

  From the state illustrated in FIG. 42 (a) to the state illustrated in FIG. 42 (b), the lower opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed to the lower extending plate 5513 (a gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 Is less than the diameter of the ball). On the other hand, the upper extension plate 5512 is retracted and released from the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches above the retaining portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b. Although a ball is permitted, the discharge from the retention portion 5314b is regulated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed to the upper extension plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a ball) Less than the diameter of The lower opening of the retaining portion 5314b is also closed to the lower extension plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is smaller than the diameter of the ball). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches above the stopping portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b. The ball is regulated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed to the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a ball) Less than the diameter of On the other hand, the lower extending plate 5513 is retracted and opened from the lower opening of the retaining portion 5314 b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches above the stopping portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b. The ball is regulated. Further, this restriction is similarly maintained from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). On the other hand, the ball disposed in the retaining portion 5314b in the state illustrated in FIG. 43 (a) is discharged toward the second detection port 5314c in the state illustrated in FIG. 43 (b).

  Therefore, since there is no time when the retaining portion 5314b is simultaneously opened in the series of operations of the movable plate portion 5510, the ball P52 reaching the retaining portion 5314b can be reliably retained.

  In the present embodiment, the rotary disc 5522 is rotated clockwise in a front view, but the same repetitive operation can be performed with a half cycle shift even when rotated counterclockwise in a front view. That is, since the rotational direction is not limited, the design freedom of the drive mode can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the detection device 5540 can always detect the disposition of the transmission member 5530 that slides to the left and right as the rotary disc 5522 rotates. That is, both the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 detect the initial phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42 (a), and the second of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42 (b). The first sensor 5542 detects a phase while the second sensor 5543 does not detect it, and the third phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. Both the 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are detected, and in the fourth phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43B, the first sensor 5542 does not detect it, while the second sensor 5543 detects it.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 5530 is operating normally, the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are switched at a constant interval, so switching of the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 can be performed. By confirming the mode, it is possible to immediately determine whether the system is operating normally or whether any abnormality (for example, it has stopped due to a malfunction) has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, a ball may get on the upper surfaces of the upper side extending plate 5512 and the lower side extending plate 5513. In this case, the weight of the balls may cause the extension plates 5152 and 5513 to tilt to the front side, but as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the upper extension plate 5512 is located on the lower side of the upper end long hole 5314b2. The extension plate 5513 is inserted into the lower end long hole 5314b3 from the rear side, and the movement in the vertical direction is restricted. Therefore, the inclination angle of each of the extension plates 5152 and 5513 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are configured as separate members and are configured to allow some rattling in the vertical direction, the movable plate portion 5510 is inclined to the front side. The degree (transmission degree) of the tilting operation of the transmission member 5530 accompanying the operation can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, since the transfer member 5530 can be prevented from tilting operation back and forth, it is possible to prevent an increase in resistance generated at the connection position (contact position) with the rotating disc 5522 and to reduce the transmission. The members 5530 can be prevented from being in contact with the respective sensors 5542 and 5543 in the front-rear direction and being loaded on the respective sensors 5542 and 5543.

  Then, the flow-down aspect of the ball which flows down the main body member 5310 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example when the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected and an operation mode of each part, and FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) And FIG.46 (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove 5314 and the retention apparatus 5500 which shows an example of a motion of the ball | bowl in the continuous passage groove 5314. As shown in FIG. In addition, about the retention apparatus 5500, in order to make an understanding easy, only the movable plate part 5510 is shown and illustration of another structure is abbreviate | omitted, About the movable plate part 5510, it can visually recognize through the retention part 5314b by a plain view. The part is illustrated by a solid line, and the other part is illustrated by a hidden line (broken line).

  In FIG. 44, when the output pulse of the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e is turned ON, the sphere passes the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e. The waveforms are illustrated in a manner that indicates timing. In the timing chart of the introduction groove 5314a, a pulse rises upward at the timing when the ball enters the introduction groove 5314a from the first groove 5311, and a pulse rises downward at the timing when the ball is discharged from the introduction groove 5314a to the stopping portion 5314b. In an aspect, a waveform is illustrated. Although the waveform of the timing chart of the holding device 5500 shows the change of the state, it is simplified and illustrated as a rectangular wave for easy understanding.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 44, the balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 continuously at intervals of about 0.2 seconds. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of balls entering the ball at one time is five, and therefore, in the example illustrated in FIG. Corresponds to a ball.

  Among the balls entering the first winning opening 64, the ball P51 entering at the top passes the detection opening 312d while changing the stopping device 3340 from the initial state to the change state. After the stopping device 3340 changes to the changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds until the maintenance of the state is canceled by the action of the ball P51, so the follow-up balls P52 to P55 The ball enters the continuous passage groove 5314 while being in contact with it.

  Although FIG. 44 illustrates the case where the balls P52 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 after the ball P51, the ball entering aspect of the ball is not limited to this. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, it takes three seconds until the maintenance of the change state of the stopping device 3340 is released by the action of the ball P51, and after the release, the stopping device 3340 is in the initial state Since it takes about 1 second to become, the action of the ball P51 causes the stop device 3340 to flow down the continuous passage groove 5314 for about 4 seconds after the stop device 3340 changes from the initial state to the change state. The down flow path is switched. That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the balls having entered the first winning opening 64 in series but the ball P51 has entered the first winning opening 64 for less than about 4 seconds after entering the first winning opening 64. The ball that has entered 64 can be entered into the continuous passage groove 5314 by the action of the stopping device 3340.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 44, since the retaining device 5500 is in the upper open state at the timing when the trailing balls P52 to P55 reach the lower end of the continuous passage groove 5314, the leading ball of the trailing balls is selected. The ball P52, which is a ball, enters the retaining portion 5314b, and the other balls P53 to P55 stay in the continuous passage groove 5314 (see FIG. 45A).

  As illustrated in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, when the number of backtracking balls is large (in the case of four balls P52 to P55 in this example), the balls P55 staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 are It can stop at the front side position of the upper limit discharge port 5314a1.

  In this case, the ball P55 is pushed out toward the upper limit outlet 5314a1 by collision with the ball P54 staying earlier (the velocity component directed to the rear side is increased), enters the branch flow path 5314d, and the third It passes through the detection port 5314e. Therefore, the upper limit number (dynamic upper limit number) of balls that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 5314b capable of retaining the balls in the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to 3, and there are more balls entered Even then, the balls do not stay and flow to the branch flow channel 5314d, and later pass through the third detection port 5314e (see FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. 46 (a)).

  As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of balls staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 even when adjustment is made such that the ball entering frequency to the first winning opening 64 becomes excessively high. It is possible to prevent clogging.

  As illustrated in FIG. 44, the spheres P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c later. That is, among the plurality of balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, the head ball P51 passes the detection port 312d, and the following ball P52 to P54 passes the second detection port 5314c and overflows The sphere P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  Therefore, the ball P51 inevitably passes the detection port 312d before the ball P55 passes the third detection port 5314e regardless of the timing to start the game. Therefore, at the timing when the ball P55 enters the third detection port 5314e, it is possible to execute the variable display started due to the ball passing at least the detection port 312d. As a result, the variable display performed due to the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e can be naturally noticed.

  That is, the fluctuation display (variation display of the first symbol or the accompanying fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81) started due to the ball passing through the detection opening 312d shifts the gaming state to the jackpot state Because it is a variable display relating to whether or not to cause it, the player's attention is naturally drawn while the variable display started due to the ball passing through the third detection port 5314e (normal symbol 2) the fluctuation display of the 2 symbols) or the fluctuation display in the 3rd symbol display 81 which accompanies it, because it is not the fluctuation display which directly relates to the transition to the jackpot state, attention is hard to gather.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variable display (normal symbol (the second symbol)) or the third symbol display device 81 accompanying it starts being started due to the ball passing through the third detection port 5314e. When the variable display is performed, the variable display started by the ball passing through the detection opening 312d (the variable display of the first symbol or the variable display at the third symbol display device 81 accompanying it) ) Can be displayed simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81, and the attentional power of the first symbol variation display or the accompanying variation display on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed. It can be made to pay attention also to the fluctuation display of a normal symbol (the 2nd design), or the fluctuation display in the 3rd symbol display device 81 accompanying it, using.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from missing that the variation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) and the symbol to be stopped and displayed are the symbols (for example, the symbols of “o”) indicating a hit. Therefore, the player is not aware of the fact that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is a hit, and the electric role object 640a is opened and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 5314b fluctuates according to the ball entering timing. That is, as described above, if the retaining device 5500 is in the upper open state when the foremost ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introducing groove 5314a among the balls entering the introducing groove 5314a, the ball P52 is held in the retaining portion 5314b. Since the third ball P55 counted from the ball P53 is discharged into the branch flow channel 5314d, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retention portion 5314b is 3 of the balls P52 to P54. It becomes an individual.

  On the other hand, when the retaining device 5500 is in the both closed state or the lower open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introducing groove 5314a, the ball P52 does not enter the retaining portion 5314b and It stops at the lower end position (see FIG. 46 (b)). In this case, since the third ball P54 counted from the ball P52 is discharged to the branch flow path, the upper limit of the number of balls which can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b is the balls P52, P53. Of two.

  In this case, when the holding device 5500 changes its state to the upper open state before the ball P54 stops in the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P53 also descends as the ball P52 enters the holding portion 5314b. Since the gap is opened between the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 and the ball P53, the ball P54 can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a (see FIG. 45A). As a result, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 5314b is three balls P52 to P54.

  As described above, even when the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 with the same number and frequency by changing the upper limit of the number of balls that can be parked in the introduction groove 5314a and the anchoring portion 5314b according to the timing, the result It is possible to change the profit given to the player as the timing of entering the ball. This makes it possible to provide a fresh game (a game that does not get tired).

  An interval of timing at which the spheres P51 to P54 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c will be described. A period required for the ball P51 to enter the first winning opening 64 and to pass through the detection opening 312d is set unchanged.

  On the other hand, the period from the head sphere P51 passing through the detection opening 312d to the entrance right after the sphere P51 until the backtracking ball P52 passes through the second detection opening 5314c changes depending on the situation.

  This is because, in order for the ball P52 to pass through the second detection port 5314c, after the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b in the upper open state of the stopping device 5500, it is necessary to change the state of the stopping device 5500 to the lower open state Depending on how many seconds after the retention device 5500 changes to the upper open state, the retention device 5500 enters the lower open state after the ball P52 enters the retention portion 5314b, depending on how many seconds it enters the retention portion 5314b. It is because time until it is different.

  In the present embodiment, after the head sphere P51 passes through the detection opening 312d, the period after the rear tracking sphere P52 passes through the second detection opening 5314c after entering the ball immediately after that is the first winning opening 64 The shape of the introduction groove 5314a is designed so as to be at least a fluctuation period (3 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as a retention lower limit lower period) which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls is three or four. In addition, the reserve digestion lower limit period, which is a variation period that is likely to be selected when the number of reserve balls is three or four, is the same as in the other embodiments (for example, the first embodiment) unless specifically described in detail. Be done.

  That is, the ball entering the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c after passing through the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b. In this embodiment, the ball acting on the ball reaching the stopping portion 5314b stops It takes at least 1.5 seconds for the device 5500 to change state from the upper open state to the lower open state.

  Therefore, when the ball enters the holding portion 5314b immediately before the holding device 5500 changes from the upper open state to the closed state (it is possible to enter the holding portion 5314b, and thereafter the holding device 5500 is in the lower open state Even if the time required to change the state is the shortest), it takes 1.5 seconds for the ball to be discharged from the retaining portion 5314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c.

  In this embodiment, since the minimum retention digestion period is defined by 3 seconds, if the time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is 1.5 seconds or more, the ball enters the continuous passage groove 5314. It is possible that the retention / digestion lower limit period elapses from when it passes through the second detection port 5314c. In the present embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a is designed in such a shape (length, inclination, etc.) that it takes 2 seconds for the sphere flowing down by gravity to pass through the introduction groove 5314a in consideration of the allowance.

  Thereby, even if the plurality of balls P51 to P55 are caused to enter the first winning opening 64 when the number of the first special symbol displayed displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is three, the ball P52 Since it is possible to end the change (the change corresponding to the case of three first special symbols being held) by the time the second passes through the second detection port 5314c, to the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64 On the other hand, it is possible to maximize the chance of lottery for the player to be obtained (the opportunity for lottery of the first symbol or the second symbol).

  The intervals at which the follow-up balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c are equally spaced corresponding to the operating speed of the retaining device 5500. This is because even if the trailing balls P52 to P54 flow down any number of balls in the introduction groove 5314a, only one ball can enter the stopping portion 5314b.

  That is, the timing at which the balls P53 and P54 entering the first winning opening 64 later than the ball P52 enter the stopping portion 5314b regardless of the state of the stopping device 5500 is designated. Describing in detail, when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a when the retaining device 5500 is in the upper open state, the flow is restricted by the ball P52 retained in advance in the retaining portion 5314b and the ball P52 is removed from the retaining portion 5314b. It is considered impossible for the ball P53 to enter the retaining portion 5314b until it is discharged.

  Therefore, regardless of the state of the holding device 5500 when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a, the holding device 5500 is opened to the next (when the reaching state is the upper open state, the next) Until the state changes to the state, the ball P53 is positioned above the upper extension plate 5512 and does not enter the stopping portion 5314b.

  Thereafter, the ball P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after the retention device 5500 changes its state to the lower open state. After that, every time the retaining device 5500 is in the upper open state, the balls P53 and P54 enter the retaining portion 5314b one ball at a time, and every time the retaining device 5500 changes to the lower open state through both closed states, It passes through the second detection port 5314c.

  Therefore, since the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c one ball at a time when the retaining device 5500 is in the lower open state, the intervals at which the balls P52 to P54 pass the second detection port 5314c are maintained constant. can do. In the present embodiment, since the retention device 5500 is controlled to operate repeatedly at six-second intervals, the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c at six-second intervals.

  Therefore, since the interval at which the balls P52 to P54 are detected can be made equal to or longer than the reserve digestion lower limit period, the balls P52 to P54 are detected before the reserve digestion lower limit period elapses. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the opportunity of the lottery for the number of balls which entered the ball can not be obtained.

  As described above, since the timing at which the ball P52 entering the first winning opening 64 immediately after the lead ball P51 enters the stopping portion 5314b can change depending on the state of the holding device 5500, the ball P51 has the detection port 312d. The timing at which the light beam passes and the timing at which the sphere P52 passes the second detection port 5314c can be changed from time to time (change the passage interval). Therefore, even in the case where the first winning opening 64 is continuously pitched at the same interval, the timing (interval) at which the first symbol holding display is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from time to time. , Can give the game freshness.

  In particular, when the balls continuously enter the first winning opening 64 while the balls stay in the continuous passage groove 5314, the balls newly enter the continuous passage groove 5314 by the action of the balls staying in the continuous passage groove 5314. The ball is prevented from entering the retaining portion 5314 b. Therefore, since the timing at which the ball newly entering the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed, the occurrence of overflow due to the ball entering the first winning opening 64 can be suppressed. Can.

  Also, for example, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is displayed as two, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the variation display currently performed (variation display for 6 seconds) ends before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52 and after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52 Since it is possible to consider the case, it will be described separately.

  In the case where the variable display ends before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the ball P51 has passed the detection port 312d before the passage of the sphere P52, and the number of holding balls becomes three. The variable display is started, and the variable display (3 seconds) and the next variable display (3 seconds) end before the ball P53 passes the second detection port 5314c. Accordingly, since two vacant balls are reserved before the balls P53 and P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c, the first special is triggered by the balls P53 and P54 passing through the second detection port 5314c. It is possible to execute the variable display of the symbol. That is, by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player.

  When the variable display ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the spheres P51 and P52 pass the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c after the passage of the sphere P52 and before the passage of the sphere P53. As a result, the variable display (3 seconds) in the state where the number of holding balls becomes 4 is started, and the variable display ends before the ball P53 passes the second detection port 5314c. After that, the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c while the variable display (3 seconds) started when the number of holding balls is three, and then, it starts when the number of holding balls is four. After the variable display (3 seconds) ends, the sphere P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed with the balls P52 to P54 passing through the second detection port 5314c as a trigger. That is, by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player.

  Further, for example, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is displayed as one, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the variation display currently performed (variation display for 10 seconds) ends before the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51, and after the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51 and the second of the sphere P52. Since it may be considered that it ends before the passage of the detection port 5314c and after the passage of the second detection port 5312c of the sphere P52 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P53, it is divided It will be described in order. In addition, in this embodiment, the time of the fluctuation display which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls is 0 is set to 15 seconds.

  In the case where the variable display ends before the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51, the variable display started when the number of holding balls is 0 is performed before the ball P51 passes the detection port 312d. Therefore, since four vacant areas of the holding ball of the first special symbol are secured, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with the balls P51 to P54 passing through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. can do. That is, by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player.

  If the variable display ends after the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the change display being executed when the ball P52 passes the second detection opening 5314c is It will be a variable display (6 seconds) started when the number of balls held is 2. Accordingly, since this variation display ends before the sphere P53 passes the second detection port 5314c, two vacant areas of the first special symbol holding sphere are present before the sphere P53 passes the second detection port 5314c. As secured, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol, triggered by the passage of the balls P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. That is, by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player.

  If the variable display ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P52 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P53, the variable display started after the end of the variable display indicates that the number of holding balls is 3 It becomes a variable display (3 seconds) started at the time of Therefore, since the variable display ends before the ball P54 passes the second detection port 5314c, the vacant area of the holding ball of the first special symbol is taken before the ball P54 passes the second detection port 5314c. Since one can be secured, variation display of the first special symbol can be executed with the passage of balls P51 to P54 as a trigger through detection port 312d or second detection port 5312c. That is, by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player.

  In addition, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is zero, the vacant area of the number of holding balls is sufficient (more than the number of data acquired by passing the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c of the balls P51 to P54) Because it is secured, the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed triggered by the passage of the spheres P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c regardless of the end timing of the fluctuation display. That is, by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of holding balls is not limited to three, and even when the number of holding balls is from zero to two, as shown in FIG. It is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering in succession.

  Here, the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e will be described. For example, in a detection port A where the ball entering the first winning opening 64 executes variable display of the first special symbol by passing the ball, and a detection port B which executes variable display of the normal symbol by passing the ball. In the case of gaming machines that can be sorted in order, if the previous game ended immediately after the ball passed the detection opening A, the first winning opening 64 is the first ball among the balls fired by the player who will play the next game. The ball entering the ball passes through the detection port B. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the variable display of the normal symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the time required for the player to win the jackpot is extended.

  In addition, since it is difficult to determine whether the ball entering the ball is going to the detection port A or the detection port B next to the gaming machine described above, the ball to enter the first winning opening 64 first Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the first special symbol variation display is performed or the normal symbol variation display is performed, and there is a problem that the intention to start the game may be impaired.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at least the ball that first enters the first winning opening 64 after the start of the game inevitably passes the detection opening 312d (the detection opening that executes the variable display of the first special symbol) It does not pass through the 3rd detection mouth 5314e (a detection mouth which usually performs change indication of a design) which is constituted in the mode which does. On the other hand, the ball is made to enter the third detection port 5314 e by causing the first winning opening 64 to enter a predetermined number or more of balls within a predetermined period.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to start playing the game while having the advantage of being able to execute the variable display of the normal symbol by entering the ball into the first winning opening 64. Regardless of the situation, it is possible to maintain the function of executing the variation display of the first special symbol triggered by the ball entering the first winning opening 64 first. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in gaming will.

  According to the present embodiment, when the balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 in a short period, the trailing ball (for example, the ball P53) is stopped by the retaining device 5500 and the second detection port is stopped. In addition to delaying the passage of 5314c, it has a function of stopping the flow-down of the ball that has passed through the continuous passage groove 5314 among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 by follow-up. That is, for example, eight more seconds after the ball P51 shown in FIG. 44 enters the first winning opening 64 (approximately simultaneously with the timing when the ball P53 passes the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a), two more balls When the player enters the first winning opening 64 in a row, the leading ball changes the stop device 3340 in the same manner as the ball P51, and then goes to the detection opening 312d, while the trailing ball is the same as the ball P52. Into the continuous passage groove 5314.

  At this time, in the continuous passage groove 5314, the balls P53 and P54 are retained by the retaining device 5500. Therefore, the follow-on ball is stopped by the ball P54 on the upstream side of the ball P54. That is, even if the ball enters the first winning opening 64 with an interval (for example, an interval longer than the time required for the stopping device 3340 to return to the initial state), the ball flows down. Can be stopped by the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 earlier. Therefore, the timing at which the follow-up ball passes the second detection port 5314c can be delayed by the action generated by the balls P53 and P54 that entered the ball earlier (after the balls P53 and P54 pass the second detection port 5314c) , And a mode in which the following ball passes through the second detection port 5314c).

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the fifth embodiment, the stationary device 5500 is operated by the single drive device 5520. However, in the delay device 6300 in the sixth embodiment, the stationary device 6500 is operated by the plurality of drive devices 6520. That is, different from the fifth embodiment, it is possible to create, in a plurality of modes, the intervals at which the balls having passed through the introduction groove 5314a of the continuous passage groove 6314 pass the second detection port 5314c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, FIG. 2 will be appropriately referred to in the description of the present embodiment.

  47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 6300 in the sixth embodiment. In FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), the balls P61 and P62 enter the first winning opening 64 continuously, and as a result, the state where the stopping device 3340 is changed is shown. . Also, in FIG. 47 (a), a state in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the retaining device 6500 overhangs the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed state) is illustrated, and in FIG. 47 (b), the pair of movable plates A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open state) is illustrated.

  The pair of balls P61 and P62 illustrated in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) is illustrated as having entered the first winning opening 64 with a slight interval. In the present embodiment, the ball P61 passes through the flow path 5313 after detection (pass over 3 seconds), and the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state (returns over 1 second) to the stop device 3340 The abutted ball flows down the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the ball P62. That is, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 in less than about 4 seconds after the first ball P61 entering the first winning opening 64 passes through the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the ball P62. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the continuous passage groove 6314 is caused to flow down not only with the ball entering the first winning opening 64 in a row but also with the ball entering the first winning opening 64 at an interval. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 47, since the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as a device having a symmetrical shape with the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the third embodiment, they are in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as in the description are given, and the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the delay device 6300 has a main body member 6310 having a flow-down path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d and the action of the ball flowing down the inside of the main body member 6310 When the stop device 3340 changes its state and the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and the stop is caused by the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. A maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the device 3340, and a retention device 6500 for acting on a ball flowing down a continuous passage groove 6314 described later and for retaining the ball are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the main body member 6310 forms a downward inclined flow path and guides the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 up to a position vertically above the detection opening 312d, and the first groove 5311 A second groove 5312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, a post-detection flow path 5313 in which a ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and an intermediate position of the second groove 5312 And a continuous passage groove 6314 formed as a groove branched to the side (the right side in FIG. 47).

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the after-detection flow path 5313 and the continuous passage groove 6314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is in the game board 13 in the assembled state. By being closed, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312 and the post-detection flow passage 5313 have the same configuration as the third embodiment (the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312 and the post-detection flow passage 3313) and a symmetrical shape. Since the configuration is the same as that of the third embodiment, the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e is extended to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 6314 is disposed between the abutment wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e to form a branch passage capable of throwing a ball.

  The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300 includes a stopping portion 6314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and the second detection port 5314c is disposed immediately below the stopping portion 6314b.

  Similarly to the retaining portion 5314b of the fifth embodiment, the retaining portion 6314b is configured as a groove portion capable of retaining only one ball and capable of flowing down. In the present embodiment, as described later, the ball that has reached the retaining portion 6314b may pass through the retaining portion 6314b (does not stay) even if it is stopped by the retaining portion 6314b.

  The stopping device 6500 of the delay device 6300 is a drive constituted by a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 6510. A device 6520 is mainly provided.

  The movable plate portion 6510 is an upper movable plate 6511 that protrudes and retracts inside the continuous passage groove 6314 at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 6314b, and a position separated by one ball downstream of the upper movable plate 6511 And a lower movable plate 6512 that protrudes and retracts into the continuous passage groove 6314.

  The upper movable plate 6511 restricts the flow of the ball by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is smaller than the diameter of the ball in the projecting state projecting inside the continuous passage groove 6314 The ball is allowed to flow down in the retracted state where it is retracted outward from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314).

  The lower movable plate 6512 extends in the extending direction of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the ball by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is smaller than the diameter of the ball in the projecting state projecting inside the continuous passage groove 6314 In the retracted state where the downward flow along the (vertical direction) is restricted and the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted outward, the downward flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the ball is allowed.

  In this embodiment, the time required for the center of the ball P62 to pass through the upper movable plate 6511 (after entering into the stopping portion 6314b) and to pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (to be discharged from the stopping portion 6314b) The flow path resistance of the retaining portion 6314 b is set such that NT falls within 0.1 seconds to 0.2 seconds.

  The driving device 6520 is fixed to the delay device 6300 and generates the driving force for moving the upper movable plate 6511 up and down. The driving device 6520 is fixed to the delay device 6300 and operates the lower movable plate 6512 to move up and down. And a lower drive solenoid 652 that generates a drive force.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 6521 and the lower movable plate 6512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 6522. Therefore, the respective operations can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is drive-controlled in such a manner as to operate the pair of movable plate portions 6510 in a predetermined operation pattern illustrated in FIG. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 which changes depending on the timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the operation pattern of the movable plate portion 6510 includes the operation of the chain opening period T6a, the operation of the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T6a, and both opening following the upper closing period T6b. It is comprised by the operation | movement of period T6c, and the operation | movement of lower closing period T6d which follows the open period T6c.

  In the chain opening period T6a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 alternately open and close. After the upper movable plate 6511 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (opens the continuous passage groove 6314) after a slight delay. Note that, in the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled in a state of changing its state at intervals of 1.5 seconds, and the lower movable plate 6512 maintains the retracted state for 0.8 seconds, and then protrudes 2.2. Operation is controlled in such a manner as to maintain for a second and repeat the change to the retracted state again, and the chain opening period T6a is set for 30 seconds.

  Thus, the number of balls passing through the upper movable plate 6511 can be limited while the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 in the chain opening period T6a. In the present embodiment, since the number of balls stopped between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is one, the upper movable plate 6511 can move upward while retracting from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314. The upper limit number of balls passing through the plate 6511 can be limited to one.

  Also, after the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, for a period of 0.05 seconds (from the period required for the ball to pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (0.1 seconds to 0.2 seconds) And the lower movable plate 6512 projects (closes) to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314.

  This makes it possible to ensure that the ball having passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and prevents the ball from passing through. In the present embodiment, the lower movable plate 6512 switches from the projecting state to the retracted state 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 switches from the retracted state to the projecting state (timing in the middle of the maintaining period of the projecting state). In an aspect, the drive 6520 is driven.

  Here, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the projecting state for 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the projecting state, the ball P62 is immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the projecting state from the retracted state. Even when the upper movable plate 6511 is passed (invaded in the retaining portion 6314b), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained above the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 0.75 seconds.

  In addition, since the period from the upper movable plate 6511 being retracted to the lower movable plate 6512 being shorter than the time NT, the ball immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the projecting state to the retracted state Even when P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters into the stopping portion 6314b), while the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the projecting state (2.2 seconds), the ball P62 is used for the lower movable plate 6512 It can be reliably maintained on the upper side.

  Thereby, the ball P62 passes through the stopping portion 6314b regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters into the stopping portion 6314b) (flows down without stopping on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512). ) Can be prevented.

  In the upper closing period T6b, the upper movable plate 6511 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 for a period (for example, 6 seconds) longer than the period in which the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the overhang in the chain opening period T6a described above. The balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 are prevented from passing through the upper movable plate 6511. In this case, the balls are more likely to stay above the upper movable plate 6511 as compared to the chain opening period T6a.

  Therefore, when the upper closing period T6b causes the ball to continuously enter the continuous passage groove 6314 compared to the chain opening period T6a, the third detection is performed via the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 and the branch flow passage 5314d. It becomes easy to pass through the mouth 5314e.

  In the present embodiment, a variable symbol display of a normal symbol is triggered by the passage of a ball through the third detection port 5314e (the electric combination 640a (see FIG. 2) for restricting the ball entering the second winning opening 640). It is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation display of the lottery which carries out open operation | movement will be performed. Therefore, it is easier to obtain an opportunity to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640 if the ball is continuously entered into the first winning opening 64 during the upper closing period T6 b as compared to the chain opening period T6 a. Can.

  Thereby, for example, as a pre-reading effect of the upper closing period T6b, "three balls are put in the first winning opening 64 for 5 seconds in the third symbol display device 81 slightly before the upper closing period T6b starts. If it is possible, inform the player that a special profit can be obtained by making the first winning opening 64 enter a ball continuously by displaying as “Electrically operated product 640 a open?” Can. Thereby, the quality of the profit given to the player can be changed by the ball entering timing by making the ball continuously enter the first winning opening 64, thereby preventing the player from randomly hitting the ball. can do.

  In addition, the change in the quality of the profit given to the player by the ball entry timing is repeated at regular intervals regardless of the game mode of the player. In the present embodiment, the content of the quality of profit relating to the ball entry timing is set in a mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device. Therefore, the player can launch the ball at a desired timing, so that the player can play the game after recognizing the difference in the quality of the profit given to the player at the timing of entering the ball.

  That is, in the upper closing period T6b, in exchange for the advantage that it is easy to open the electric combination 640a by making the ball continuously enter the continuous passage groove 6314, the third drawing pertaining to the drawing of the opening of the electric combination 640a. Since the player does not receive a winning ball by passing the ball through the detection port 5314e, there is a disadvantage that the number of winning balls with respect to the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64 is easily reduced.

  On the other hand, in the above-described chain opening period T6a, the balls are sent to the stopping portion 6314b at short intervals compared to the upper closing period T6b, so the balls are less likely to stay on the upper movable plate 6511, and the continuous passage groove The ball flowing down 6314 can be easily passed through the second detection port 5314 c without leaking. Therefore, although there is a problem that it is difficult to open the electric role product 640a, there is an advantage that it is possible to secure the number of winning balls with respect to the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64.

  Therefore, if the player wants to surely obtain a winning ball without expecting the opening of the motorized character 640a, the player strikes the ball so as to continuously enter the ball in the chain opening period T6a, and even if the winning balls decrease. If it is desired to play a game expecting the opening of the motorized role object 640a, it is possible to make it easier to obtain a target profit by launching the ball so as to continuously enter the ball in the upper closing period T6b.

  In the both open period T6c, the retaining device 6500 is maintained in the both open state (see FIG. 47 (b)). In this case, the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 pass through the stopping portion 6314b and pass through the third detection port 5314e without being stopped by the stopping portion 6314b.

  Therefore, since the ball which has passed through the continuous passage groove 6314 does not enter the branch passage 5314d from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1, the ball is prevented from passing through the third detection port 5314e. In the present embodiment, both open periods T6c are set to six seconds.

  Although the ball does not stop at the stopping portion 6314b, it takes two seconds for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a, while the ball whose state is changed in the stopping device 3340 immediately detects the detection opening 312d. The balls P61 and P62, which continuously enter the first winning opening 64, can be passed, and the timing at which the ball P61 passes the detection port 312d and the timing at which the ball P62 passes the second detection port 5314c are ensured. It can be shifted.

  In the present embodiment, since the upper closing period T6b is set to 6 seconds, the variation display is started at the same time as the start timing of the upper closing period T6b (when the start timing of the variation display is the latest), Also, it is possible to secure two vacant areas of the number of holding balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of the subsequent two open periods T6c.

  That is, for example, even if it is the severest case (the number of holding balls is 4), the variable display (3 seconds) started when the number of holding balls is 4 and the time when the number of holding balls is 3 start And the variable display (3 seconds) can be ended by the start timing of both open periods T6c, and secure two vacant areas of the number of holding balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of both open periods T6c Can.

  Here, since the number of balls that can be stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 in the upper closing period T6b is 2, the balls which are stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 in the upper closing period T6b The variation display of the first special symbol can be executed using the passage of the second detection port 5314c as a trigger. That is, the profit given to the player can be maximized by the plurality of balls entering the first winning opening 64.

  In the lower closing period T6d, the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the continuous passage groove 6314 to allow passage of the ball, while the lower movable plate 6512 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 to restrict passage of the ball.

  The lower closing period T6d is the same as stopping the ball by the action of the movable plate portion 6510 in comparison with the upper closing period T6b, but the number of balls that can be kept is different. That is, in the lower closing period T6d, in addition to the number of balls staying in the upper closing period T6b (two in the present embodiment), the number of balls staying in the stopping portion 6314b (one in the present embodiment) Can be stopped.

  Therefore, the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 are allowed to flow through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow passage 5314d and to pass through the third detection port 5314e in addition to the number of balls required in the upper closing period T6b. Therefore, it is necessary to enter one more first winning opening 64. That is, the degree of difficulty in causing the ball to pass through the third detection port 5314e is higher than in the case where the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e in the upper closing period T6b.

  On the other hand, since the chain opening period T6a continues after the lower closing period T6d, the balls staying in the holding device 6500 in the lower closing period T6d are one ball in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T6a. Through the second detection port 5314c. This ensures a longer period until the subsequent ball passes the second detection port 5314c, as compared to the ball staying in the upper closing period T6b passing the second detection port 5314c at once in both open periods T6c. Since it becomes easy to do, it can be made easy to prevent the ball from passing through the second detection port 5314c in a state where the number of holding balls of the variable display of the first special symbol is maximum (four) (the ball is the second It can be made easy to prevent that the situation which can not get the opportunity of a lottery, although it passed detection port 5314c can be made easy).

  Therefore, for example, as a pre-reading effect of the lower closing period T6d, slightly before the lower closing period T6d starts, "3 balls in the first winning opening 64 plus 5 balls in 5 seconds in the third symbol display device 81 If it can be inserted, it is displayed that the electric role part 640a is open (high degree of difficulty, high degree of security).

  As a result, although a special benefit can be obtained by causing the player to continuously enter the ball in the first winning opening 64, the degree of difficulty in obtaining the special benefit is high while the continuous entry of the ball is continuous. It can be informed that the degree of security for securing the benefit (number of winning balls and opportunity for lottery) given to the player by the played ball is high. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the frequency of the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and it is possible to prevent the player from randomly hitting the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the lower closing period T6d is set to 8 seconds (a period longer than the upper closing period T6b). Thereby, the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 flow through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow passage 5314d, and the number of balls entered into the first winning opening 64 necessary for passing through the third detection port 5314e Is a period which increases in comparison with the upper closing period T6b, a sufficient period for entering a large number of balls into the first winning opening 64 can be secured, and the balls pass through the third detection opening 5314e. You can create many opportunities.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the continuous opening period T6a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds) and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are sequentially arranged. The driver 6520 is controlled to loop at intervals of 50 seconds.

  Thus, the holding device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T6a in half or more of the operation time, and in the meantime, the balls are discharged one by one from the holding portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. While making it possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol triggered by (to make it easy to execute the variable display of the first special symbol), at other times, to the first winning opening 64 The period (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d) which enables the variation display of the normal symbol using a part of the ball, and the period (both open period T6c) which makes the variation display of the normal symbol impossible, Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize sharp gameplay, and to adjust the timing of launch by the player to achieve desired gameplay.

  That is, for example, when it is desired to enter the ball into the first winning opening 64 specifically to execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball is directed to the first winning opening 64 only in the chain opening period T6a. In the other period (T6b to T6d), the ball may not be launched and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the possibility of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 passing through the third detection opening 5314e can be reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, when it is desired to obtain an opportunity to display a variation display of a normal symbol even at the expense of an opportunity to display a variation of the first special symbol, the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d are aimed and the first winning The ball may be fired toward the mouth 64, and in the other period (T6a and T6c), the launch of the ball may be stopped to pay attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the possibility of passing the third detection port 5314e when the ball enters the first winning port 64 continuously, as compared to the case of always striking out toward the first winning port 64, is increased. Can.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the ball retained by the retaining portion 6314b is limited to one ball has been described, but the delay device 6300b in the modification of the sixth embodiment is a device between the pair of movable plate portions 6510. The area (corresponding to the stopping portion 6314b2) is configured to be large enough to accommodate a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) balls. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, FIG. 2 will be appropriately referred to in the description of the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 49A and 49B are partial front views of a delay device 6300 b according to a modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the balls P61 and P62 enter the first winning opening 64 continuously, and as a result, the state in which the stopping device 3340 is changed is shown. . Further, FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the retaining device 6500b overhangs the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed state), and FIG. 49 (b) shows the pair of movable plates A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the delay device 6300 b according to the modification of the sixth embodiment has a size capable of accommodating two balls in the retaining portion 6314 b in comparison with the configuration of the delay device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment. According to the present invention, the upper movable plate 6511 and the upper drive solenoid 6521 of the retention device 6500b are moved upward, and the other configuration is the same. Therefore, the same reference numerals as those in the sixth embodiment are given, and the description of the same parts as those in the sixth embodiment is omitted.

  The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300b includes a stopping portion 6314b2 connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and the second detection port 5314c is disposed immediately below the stopping portion 6314b2.

  Unlike the retaining portion 6314b of the sixth embodiment in which only one ball enters, the retaining portion 6314b2 is formed in a size that allows a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) balls to be received, and the sphere is It is configured as a flowable ditch portion.

  In the present embodiment, as described above in the sixth embodiment, the ball that has reached the retaining portion 6314b2 can be formed even when it is retained by the retaining portion 6314b2 or passes through the retaining portion 6314b2 (does not be suspended). The driving device 6520 is driven to

  The stopping device 6500b of the delay device 6300b is a drive constituted by a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 6510. A device 6520 is mainly provided.

  The movable plate portion 6510 is an upper movable plate 6511 that protrudes and retracts into the continuous passage groove 6314 at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 6314b2, and a position separated by two balls downstream of the upper movable plate 6511 And a lower movable plate 6512 that protrudes and retracts into the continuous passage groove 6314.

  That is, the upper movable plate 6511 in the present embodiment is arranged at a position lifted by one ball as compared with the upper movable plate 6511 in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, when the ball is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the projecting state, the second ball from the end portion on the stopping portion 6314b side of the continuous passage groove 6314 is the front side of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a The ball is disposed on the front side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 49A, and the sphere is guided to the branch flow channel 5314d through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1.

  Therefore, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the projecting state, the number of balls that can be retained above the upper movable plate 6511 is set to one. Therefore, only one ball retained on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 changes from the projecting state to the retracted state.

  In addition, when the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted and the ball which has been stopped at the upper side drops immediately after falling, the ball reaches the end portion of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the side of the stopping portion 6314b2, the ball is put into the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. There is a possibility that the ball may be guided to the stopping portion 6314b2 following the previous ball.

  However, in the present embodiment, after the previous ball starts to flow down the stopping portion 6314b2, the upper movable plate is made before the space for one ball is formed on the upper side thereof (0.2 seconds to 0.3 seconds elapse). The operation of the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled in an operation mode in which 6511 is in a projecting state (see FIG. 50). As a result, while the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the retracted state, the ball that has entered the stopping portion 6314b2 earlier prevents the ball from entering the stopping portion 6314b2 of the follow-up ball, and therefore the pair of balls It can prevent continuing and entering into stop part 6314b2. That is, in the chain opening period T62a, it is possible to prevent the balls from continuously flowing to the stopping portion 6314b2 immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state.

  In this embodiment, the time required for the center of the ball P62 to pass through the upper movable plate 6511 (after entering into the stopping portion 6314b2) and to pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (to be discharged from the stopping portion 6314b2) The flow path resistance of the retaining portion 6314 b is set such that NTb falls within 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds. Hereinafter, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is drive-controlled in such a manner as to operate the pair of movable plate portions 6510 in a predetermined operation pattern illustrated in FIG. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 which changes depending on the timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the operation pattern of the movable plate portion 6510 includes the operation of the chain opening period T62a, the operation of the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T62a, and both opening following the upper closing period T6b. It is comprised by the operation | movement of period T6c, and the operation | movement of lower closing period T6d which follows the open period T6c. The upper closing period T6b, the both open periods T6c, and the lower closing period T6d are the same as those described above in the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  During the chain opening period T62a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 alternately open and close. After the upper movable plate 6511 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (opens the continuous passage groove 6314) after a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 is kept in the retracted state for 0.2 seconds (while it is possible for one ball to pass while the passage of two balls is difficult), and then the protruding state is 3 The lower movable plate 6512 is changed to the projecting state at the timing when the upper movable plate 6511 changes to the retracted state, and maintained in the projecting state for 3 seconds. After that, the retracted state is maintained for 0.2 seconds (while it is possible for one ball to pass, while it is difficult for two balls to pass), and the operation is controlled in such a manner as to repeat changing to the protruding state again. A chain opening period T62a is set in 30 seconds.

  According to such an operation mode, in the present embodiment, the number of balls to be held between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is two, while the upper movable plate 6511 is of the continuous passage groove 6314. The number of balls passing through the upper movable plate 6511 can be limited to one while retracting from the inside.

  In addition, until the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 and the lower movable plate 6512 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (projected state), and then the lower movable plate 6512 is retracted. In addition, 2.8 seconds, which is a longer period than time NTb, elapses. This makes it possible to ensure that the ball having passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and prevents the ball from passing through.

  In addition, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the projecting state for 2.6 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the projecting state, the ball P62 is immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the projecting state from the retracted state. Even when it passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (invading the retaining portion 6314b2), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained above the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 2.6 seconds.

  Thereby, the ball P62 passes through the stopping portion 6314b2 regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters into the stopping portion 6314b2) (flows down without stopping above the lower movable plate 6512). ) Can be prevented.

  In addition, after the ball is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511, the ball which has been stopped enters the stopping portion 6314b2 as the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted, and then the lower movable plate 6512 is moved. 3 seconds (a fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) which is likely to be selected in the case of 3 or 4 balls held) until it flows down and passes through the second detection port 5314c with the retraction state. It takes a long time. Therefore, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c via the stopping device 6500b, the ball passes over the first winning port 64 (the ball passes through the detection port in the first winning port 64 (for example, the second detection port 5314c) However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the opportunity for drawing can not be obtained.

  In the upper closing period T6b, by inserting two balls in the continuous passage groove 6314, the ball that has entered the second ball enters the branch flow passage 5314d through the upper limit outlet hole 5314a, and the third detection port 5314e Pass through. As a result, the number of balls required to enter the continuous passage groove 6314 can be reduced in order to create a situation where the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e as compared with the case described in the sixth embodiment. Can easily be made to pass through the third detection port 5314e.

  In the both open period T6c and the lower closed period T6d, the state of the continuous passage groove 6314 is the same as the open period T6c and the lower closed period T6d in the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  On the other hand, unlike the sixth embodiment, when a plurality of balls are guided to the continuous passage groove 6314 in the lower closing period T6b, two balls are accommodated in the retaining portion 6314b2 when shifting to the chain opening period T62a thereafter. In this state, the opening and closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T62a is started.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the period in which the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the retracted state during the chain opening period T62a is 0.2 seconds (one ball can pass while two balls are difficult to pass). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the plurality (two in the present embodiment) of the balls staying in the stopping portion 6314b from passing through the second detection port 5314c in a row.

  That is, one ball at a time passes through the second detection port 5314c in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T62a. As a result, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c via the stopping device 6500b, the ball overflows at the first winning port 64 (the ball in the first detection port 64 (for example, the second detection port 5314c) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the opportunity for lottery can not be obtained despite the passage.

  Therefore, for example, as a pre-reading effect of the lower closing period T6d, slightly before the lower closing period T6d starts, "3 balls in the first winning opening 64 plus 5 balls in 5 seconds in the third symbol display device 81 If it can be inserted, it is displayed that the electric role part 640a is open (high degree of difficulty, high degree of security).

  As a result, although a special benefit can be obtained by causing the player to enter the ball continuously in the first winning opening 64, the degree of difficulty to obtain the special benefit is increased (the ball can be entered continuously. Informing that the degree of security for the benefit (number of winning balls and opportunity for lottery) given to the player by the ball continuously entering is high while the required number is large) Can. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the frequency of the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and it is possible to prevent the player from randomly hitting the ball.

  In this embodiment, the continuous opening period T62a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds) and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in order, and 50 seconds. The drive device 6520 is drive-controlled to loop at intervals.

  Thus, the holding device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T62a in half or more of the operation time, and in the meantime, balls are discharged one by one from the holding portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. While making it possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol triggered by (to make it easy to execute the variable display of the first special symbol), at other times, to the first winning opening 64 The period (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d) which enables the variation display of the normal symbol using a part of the ball, and the period (both open period T6c) which makes the variation display of the normal symbol impossible, Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize sharp gameplay, and to adjust the timing of launch by the player to achieve desired gameplay.

  That is, for example, when it is desired to enter the ball into the first winning opening 64 specifically to execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball is directed to the first winning opening 64 only in the chain opening period T62a. In the other period (T6b to T6d), the ball may not be launched and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the possibility of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 passing through the third detection opening 5314e can be reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, when it is desired to obtain an opportunity to display a variation display of a normal symbol even at the expense of an opportunity to display a variation of the first special symbol, the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d are aimed and the first winning A ball may be emitted toward the mouth 64, and in the other period (T62a and T6c), the launch of the ball may be stopped to pay attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the possibility of passing the third detection port 5314e when the ball enters the first winning port 64 continuously, as compared to the case of always striking out toward the first winning port 64, is increased. Can.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although the fifth embodiment has described the case where the retention device 5500 is disposed downstream of the introduction groove 5314a, the delay device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is between the introduction groove 5314a and the second detection port 5314c. The stopping device 5500 is not disposed. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, the ball that has passed through the introduction groove 5314a passes through the second detection port 5314c without being stopped. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the delay device 7300 in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 51, balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the winning opening 64, and as a result, a state in which the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51, since the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as a device having a symmetrical shape with the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the third embodiment, in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as in the description are given, and the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the delay device 7300 has a main body member 7310 having a flow-down path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d and the action of the ball flowing down the inside of the main body member 7310 When the stop device 3340 changes its state and the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state (see FIG. 51), the state is maintained and the movement is stopped due to the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. And a maintenance device 3360 for releasing maintenance of the state of the device 3340.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the main body member 7310 forms a downward inclined flow path and guides the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 up to a position vertically above the detection opening 312d, and the first groove 5311 A second groove 5312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, a post-detection flow path 5313 in which a ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and an intermediate position of the second groove 5312 And a continuous passage groove 7314 formed as a groove branched to the side (the right side in FIG. 51).

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the after-detection flow path 5313 and the continuous passage groove 7314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is in the game board 13 in the assembled state. By being closed, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312 and the post-detection flow passage 5313 have the same configuration as the third embodiment (the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312 and the post-detection flow passage 3313) and a symmetrical shape. Since the configuration is the same as that of the third embodiment, the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e is extended to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 7314 is disposed between the abutment wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e to form a branch passage capable of throwing a ball.

  The continuous passage groove 7314 of the delay device 7300 includes a vertically extending groove 7314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and the second detection port 5314c is disposed at the lower end portion of the vertically extended groove 7314b.

  The vertically extending groove 7314b extends in the vertical direction and is configured as a groove portion through which a ball can flow down. In the present embodiment, the length of the vertically extending groove 7314 b is designed such that it takes one second for the ball to pass (free fall) in the vertically extending groove 7314 b.

  Next, the game characteristics in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the detection opening 312d (start winning), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger, and two winning balls are received. Is paid out, and when the ball passes the second detection port 5314c (start winning), it is used as a trigger, while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the first symbol display device 37 and four Prize balls are paid out.

  That is, after the ball P71 enters the first winning opening 64 and the stopping device 3340 returns to the initial state, a sufficient time interval (a time interval of about 4 seconds or more) is provided to allow the ball P72 to have the first winning opening. In the case of entering the ball 64, since the sphere enters only the detection port 312d, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. On the other hand, when the ball P72 is made to enter the first winning opening 64 while the stopping device 3340 is maintained in the changed state (for about 4 seconds or less), the following ball P72 is made to enter the second detection port 5314c. From this, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot distribution is performed so that the jackpot of the second special symbol can be earned more than the jackpot of the first special symbol. ). As a result, depending on whether the balls P71 and P72 enter the first winning opening 64 with a sufficient interval or enter at a short interval, the benefit given to the player at the time of a big hit may change. Therefore, the player's attention to the entry of the ball into the first winning opening 64 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed in preference to the first special symbol. Moreover, it is comprised so that a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may not change and display simultaneously. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol is always started before the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol having a high degree of attention for the player from immediately starting after the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c. That is, when the ball P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, the period of the variation display of the first special symbol that has already been executed due to the ball P71 passing through the detection port 312d is the second special symbol It can be used as a waiting time until the variable display is started.

  Therefore, after the rare event that the balls P71 and P72 enter the first winning opening 64 continuously, the variable display on the side advantageous to the player (the distribution of the jackpot is the first special for the player) It is possible to secure the time until the variation display of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the symbol) is started (a waiting period can be inserted).

  Therefore, the time to draw attention to the flow of the balls P71 and P72 entering the first winning opening 64, and the fact that the balls P71 and P72 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c, the third symbol display device Of the variable display performed at 81, the time when the variable display on the side (second special symbol) advantageous to the player can be clearly separated. As a result, it is possible to make it unnecessary for the player to move the line of sight between the first winning opening 64 and the third symbol display device 81, thereby making it possible to reduce the player's sense of fatigue.

  In addition, after the player confirms that the ball P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, thereafter, it is possible to start variable display caused by the ball P72 passing through the second detection port 5314c.

  Therefore, it is advantageous for the player that the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c as compared to the gaming machine in which the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display alternately occur. It is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the start of the variable display of the second special symbol as a series of flows.

  By this, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the variation display performed on the third symbol display device 81 next is the variation display on the side (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. it can.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. In the first embodiment, the delay device 300 is connected to the downstream side of the first winning opening 64. However, the delay device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is connected to the downstream side of the V winning device 800. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, for each of the above-described embodiments, the second winning opening 640 and the electric combination 640a are provided below the first winning opening 64, and the V winning device 800 is used instead of the first variable winning device 65. The first variable winning device 8065 (a device having the same function as the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment) in the lower right portion is provided in the lower portion of the V winning device 800, and the upper surface is a ball. A rolling plate 8091 which is formed as a movable extension plate and discharges the rolling balls to the upper part of the electric combination 640a when the electric combination 640a is in the open state is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640 It is different.

  The other parts of the configuration are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the first embodiment may be provided with a warp passage port 87 for allowing the balls to flow into the delay bed device 400 (through the so-called "warp channel") by a part of the balls flowing down the left side of the center frame 86. It is identical to the form.

  The V winning device 800 is different in that a delay device 8300 is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the embodiments described above, and the other points are the same structure.

  The first variable winning device 8065 operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) not shown. The first variable winning device 8065 performs a function of not guiding the ball to the specific winning opening 65a (does not enter) by extending (closing) the front, while retracting (opening) the back. By doing this, it functions to guide the ball to enter the specified winning hole 65a.

  The ball that has reached the first variable winning device 8065 but has not been guided to the specified winning opening 65 a due to the first variable winning device 8065 being closed is connected to the left of the first variable winning device 8065 The rolling surface is rolled to reach the upper surface of the rolling plate 8091.

  The rolling plate 8091 is inclined downward as it goes leftward in a front view. Therefore, the ball that has reached the rolling plate 8091 rolls with its upper surface directed leftward in a front view, and is discharged from the left end.

  The ball discharged from the left end of the rolling plate 8091 drops downward and is discharged from the out port 71 when the motorized accessory 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, when the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state, it rolls on the upper surface (inner surface) of the motorized accessory 640a and is guided so as to enter the second winning opening 640.

  Similar to the specific winning hole 65a of the first embodiment described above, on the right side of the V winning hole 800a, the opening and closing plate having a triangular shape in front view covering the V winning hole 800a and the lower side of the opening and closing plate open to the right A V inlet solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) for driving is provided, and the V winning opening 800a is normally in a closed state where a ball can not win or is difficult to win. When the lottery accompanying entering the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, drive the V inlet solenoid to tilt the opening and closing plate to the right, and temporarily open the ball where the V winning opening 800a is easy to win Act to form.

  A delay device 8300 is provided as a device for forming a flow path through which a ball entering the V winning device 800 passes. The V prize winning apparatus 800 is provided with a V prize winning opening 800a, and when the gaming ball enters the V prize opening 800a, the entry of the gaming ball is detected, and a predetermined game is made for the player. A ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection opening that also serves as a detection sensor. In addition, a game ball having entered the V winning opening 800a passes a V winning switch 8315d described later, whereby a jackpot game is awarded.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d does not function as a detection port that performs detection accompanied by a lottery but functions as a detection port that purely detects passage of a sphere. That is, the number of balls detected by the V winning opening 800a and the number of balls detected by the detection opening 312d are collated, and if abnormality is recognized in the difference between the numbers, control is performed so as to notify an error. By doing this, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range on the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and make it easy to find an irregularity in which a ball is directly inserted into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

  A first variable winning device 8065 is provided below the V winning device 800. The first variable winning device 8065 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) in the jackpot game, and a predetermined game ball (for example, 15 balls are paid out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the configuration of delay device 8300 in which the ball having passed V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 53 is a partial front view of the delay device 8300. FIG. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 8300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as in the third embodiment are given and the third embodiment Descriptions of parts that are the same as in the description of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the delay device 8300 has a main body member 8310 that allows the ball entering the V winning opening 800a to flow down, and a stop device 3340 whose state changes by the action of the ball flowing down the inside of the main body member 8310 When the stopping device 3340 changes, the maintaining device 3360 maintains the state and releases the maintenance of the state of the stopping device 3340 as the posture changes due to the action of the ball flowing down, as will be described later. And a holding device 8500 that mainly acts on a ball flowing down the attachment groove 8315 to hold the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main body member 8310 constitutes a flow path which descends and inclines, and a first groove 3311 for guiding a ball entering the V winning hole 800a, and a vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 The second groove 3312 extends to the side, the inclined flow path 8313 extending in the direction that descends downward from the lower end of the second groove 3312 and the side from the middle position of the second groove 3312 (see FIG. 53) is formed as a groove branching to the left (left) and extends vertically downward from a region including a branch delay groove 8314 rejoining the lower end portion of the second groove 3312 and the lower bottom opening 8313 b of the inclined channel 8313 And an arraying groove 8315 configured by a pair of grooves arranged side by side.

  The first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 8313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the juxtaposed groove 8315 have a groove shape having an opening at the game board 13 side, and the opening is By being closed to the board 13, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

  The position where the branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the second groove 3312 is the same as the position where the accommodation recess 3312 f is disposed in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball reaching the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 53) (the first ball, the ball P81 in FIG. 53) rotates the stop device 3340 and changes vertically The balls (second and subsequent follow-up balls, ball P82 in FIG. 53) which reach the stopping device 3340 when the stopping device 3340 is in a changing state while being directed downward to the inclined flow path 8313 are branched branch grooves Flow down the 8314.

  The inclined flow passage 8313 is formed as a straight flow passage which inclines downward as it goes to the right, and is a flow passage extending until the ball in contact with the contact portion 3363 is further advanced by one ball. (A flow path in which the second ball counts from the extended end when the two balls stay from the extended end), and the ball is extended from the extended end When two pieces of water are accumulated, they are disposed on the back side of the second ball counting from the extension end and are connected to the communication opening 8313a which is an opening through which the ball can pass, and extends to the communication opening 8313a And a lower bottom opening 8313 b opened downward at a position shifted by one ball in the setting direction. The inclined flow path 8313 is formed to have a shape in which four seconds pass from when the ball passes the V winning hole 800a to when it flows down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  The communication opening 8313a is formed as a flow path extending in a U-shape whose end is directed to the front side. That is, the ball entering the connection opening 8313a from the inclined flow passage 8313 flows down the U-shaped flow passage of the communication opening 8313a and is discharged to the upper end portion of the second groove 8315b. Thereafter, the ball flows down the second groove 8315b.

  The branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the lower end of the second groove 3312 at its lower end, so that the ball flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 passes through the lower end of the second groove 3312 and enters the inclined channel 8313 ( The top ball joins the downflow path). In the present embodiment, the shape of the branch delay groove 8314 is designed such that the time required for the ball to pass through the branch delay groove 8314 is 5 seconds or more.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time required for the ball P81, which has entered the V winning opening 800a first to enter the V winning opening 800a, to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b, and the V winning after the ball P81. There is a 5-second interval between the time taken for the ball P82 entering the opening 800a to enter the V winning opening 800a and reaching the lower bottom opening 8313b. As a result, even when a plurality of balls P81 and P82 collectively enter the V winning opening 800a, the timing at which the balls P81 and P82 reach the lower bottom opening 8313b is shifted, and the respective balls P81 and P82 are The drop operation to the V winning switch 8315 d can be made easy to show the player. As a result, the balls P81 and P82 gather together and flow down, and it is possible to prevent the slow flow of balls, such as not knowing which ball has passed the V winning switch 8315d.

  The ball having passed the inclined flow path 8313 abuts on the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and then flows down the alignment groove 8315. The arrangement groove 8315 is connected to the first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower bottom opening 8313b, and the flow path and the upper end which are connected to the communication opening 8313a so that the ball passing through the communication opening 8313a can flow downward. A second groove 8315b juxtaposed to the left of the first groove 8315a, a gap 8315c formed as a gap through which balls can pass from the first groove 8315a to the second groove 8315b, and a gap 8315c of the first groove 8315a A V prize switch 8315 d disposed so that a ball can pass on the downstream side and a discharge switch 8315 e through which the ball flowing down the first groove 8315 a or the second groove 8315 b passes are mainly provided.

  The ball having flowed down the delay device 8300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315 e.

  The balls having reached the additional groove 8315 flow down to the lower bottom opening 8313 b when the balls do not stay from the lower bottom opening 8313 b and then start to flow down along the first groove 8315 a.

  On the other hand, when the balls stay from the lower bottom opening 8313b, they are blocked by the staying balls and do not flow down to the lower end, and pass through the communication openings 8313a and along the second groove 8315b Start to flow down). As described above, the flow-down path of the balls reaching the attachment groove 8315 can be made different depending on whether or not the balls stay from the lower bottom opening 8313 b as a starting point. Next, a retention device 8500 capable of retaining a ball starting from the lower bottom opening 8313 b will be described.

  The holding device 8500 includes a drive device 8520 including a pair of movable plate portions 8510 and a pair of drive solenoids 8521 and 8522 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 8510; Mainly to

  The movable plate portion 8510 is an upper movable plate 8511 that protrudes and retracts into the inside of the first groove 8315a at the boundary between the lower bottom opening 8313b and the first groove 8315a, and a gap portion 8315c downstream of the upper movable plate 8511. And a lower movable plate 8512 that protrudes and retracts into the inside of the first groove 8315a at a position along the lower end side of

  The upper movable plate 8511 restricts the flow of the ball by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is smaller than the diameter of the ball in the projecting state in which the upper movable plate 8511 protrudes inside the first groove 8315a The ball is allowed to flow downward in the retracted state in which the first groove 8315a retracts outward from the inside of the first groove 8315a.

  The upper movable plate 8511 is positioned such that the upper surface position thereof is lower than the lower surface position of the lower bottom opening 8313 b. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the projecting state, the balls which flow down to the lower bottom opening 8313 b and fall on the upper movable plate 8511 can be prevented from returning (running over) to the inclined flow path 8313 when changing to the left. it can.

  The lower movable plate 8512 extends in the extending direction of the first groove 8315a of the ball by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is smaller than the diameter of the ball in a projecting state in which the lower movable plate 8512 protrudes inside the first groove 8315a. The flow down along the (vertical direction) is restricted, and the flow down along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the first groove 8315a of the ball is allowed in the retracted state where the flow is retracted outward from the inside of the first groove 8315a.

  The lower movable plate 8512 is formed in a curved shape whose upper surface is inclined downward to the second groove 8315 b. As a result, the period in which the ball dropped on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 is stopped on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 can be shortened, and the ball can be sent to the second groove 8315 b in a short time.

  In the lower movable plate 8512, the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, and the ball held on the upper movable plate 8511 starts falling and passes through the lower movable plate 8512 (on the left side thereof; see FIG. 55). It is disposed at a position where the time taken to do is less than 0.1 seconds.

  The driving device 8520 is fastened to and fixed to the delay device 8300 and generates an upper drive solenoid 8521 which generates a driving force for moving the upper movable plate 8511 up and down, and is fastened to and fixed to the delay device 8300 and causes the lower movable plate 8512 to move up and down. A lower drive solenoid 8522 for generating a drive force is mainly provided.

  In the present embodiment, the upper drive solenoid 8521 has an upper movable plate 8511 with an operation pattern set based on the small hitting type of the small hitting that occurs due to the ball entering the second winning opening 640. It excites in the aspect which makes it appear and retracts.

  On the other hand, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner as to cause the lower movable plate 8512 to move up and down in a constant operation pattern from the time of power activation. In the present embodiment, as an example, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained for 2.5 seconds in the protruding state (state for restricting passage of the ball), and then maintained for 0.5 seconds in the retracted state (state for permitting passage of the ball). The lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven in an operation pattern which repeats repeating.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 8511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 8521 and the lower movable plate 8512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 8522. Therefore, the respective operations can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

  FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when each ball entering the V winning opening 800a is detected and an operation mode of each part. In FIG. 54, the waveform is illustrated in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned ON indicates the timing at which the ball has passed the V winning opening 800a.

  The waveform illustrated as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for ease of understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the balls P81 and P82 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. It is illustrated in a manner (where the lower end is reached).

  As illustrated in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and becomes a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. Thus, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In the present embodiment, the shortest fluctuation time of the second winning opening 640 is set to 15 seconds, and the movable member inside the delay device 8300 is driven during the 15 seconds (see FIG. 54).

  In FIG. 54, a case is shown in which two balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a. That is, the balls P81 and P82 are illustrated as balls which have passed through the V winning opening 800a at a pitch interval of 1.8 seconds or less. Among the balls entering the V winning opening 800a, the ball P81 entering at the head changes the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the change state, and then flows down the inclined flow path 8313. After the stopping device 3340 changes to the changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds until the maintenance of the state is canceled by the action of the ball P81, so the follow-up ball P82 abuts on the changing state stopping device 3340 The ball enters the branch delay groove 8314.

  In this manner, the ball P81 entering at the head and the ball P82 following the trailing flow down another channel to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. The time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313 b can be defined by the flow path shape. In the present embodiment, the ball P81 takes 4 seconds until it reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b after passing through the V winning opening 800a, and the ball P82 is added for flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 (5 seconds). It takes 9 seconds.

  The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first arrival period T81 which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened The spheres P81 and P82 can not reach the lower bottom opening 8313b in a period other than the second reaching period T82. In addition, the first reaching period T81 and the second reaching period T82 are separated.

  Thus, the timing at which the ball P81 and the ball P82 flow down the additional groove 8315 can be clearly divided. That is, depending on the timing at which the ball enters the V winning opening 800 a during the opening period of the V winning device 800, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player changes. It is possible to form a case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls enter the V winning opening 800a during the open period of the game.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to show the falling operation of each of the balls P81 and P82 to the V winning switch 8315d. That is, when the balls P81 and P82 move together toward the V winning switch 8315d and one of them passes the V winning switch 8315d and the other deviates from the V winning switch 8315d, which ball (the ball enters first) It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down so that it does not know whether the ball P81 which has been balled or the ball P82) which has entered afterward has passed the V pay switch 8315d.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 54 is illustrated with the point at which the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched to the retracted state at a first opening time T83 after 7 seconds from the opening time of the V winning apparatus 800 and at a second opening time T84 after 12 seconds from the opening time of the V winning apparatus 800. (Opened), switched to the closed state after 1 second (closed). The first opening time T83 and the second opening time T84 are defined from before the ball entering timing regardless of the ball entering timing to the V winning opening 800a.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the first opening time T83 corresponds to the timing 1.2 seconds after the end of the first arrival period T81, and the second opening time T84 is from the end of the second arrival period T82. It corresponds in 2 seconds.

  Therefore, the ball passing through the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b, and a period until the arrangement of the balls is stabilized (for example, a period for containing slight vibration after colliding with the side wall, or entering three or more balls) When the second ball is to be discharged from the communication opening 8313a). Thus, the ball can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state (a shift between the operation timing of the upper movable plate 8511 and the falling start timing of the ball can be minimized). ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the V winning switch 8315 d from winning irregularly by causing the ball to flow in an unintended flowing manner.

  In this regard, in this embodiment, a period until the placement of the ball stabilizes after the leading ball P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, and after the trailing ball P82 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, It can be shortened as compared to the period until the placement is stabilized.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, when the forefront ball P81 abuts on the abutting portion 3363, the distance between the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintaining device 3360 is shortened and a sufficient attracting force works. On the other hand, when the trailing ball P82 abuts on the contact portion 3363, the space between the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintaining device 3360 is opened, and the attraction force becomes weak. The load received from the contact portion 3363 can be made larger than the load that the following ball P82 receives from the contact portion 3363.

  Thereby, the load given to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363 can be used as a braking force, and the ball P81 can be decelerated in advance before the ball P81 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. This makes it possible to reduce the degree of rebound due to the ball P81 colliding with the lower end portion of the inclined flow path 8313. Therefore, the period until the ball arrangement becomes stable after the ball P81 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, the interval between the end of the first arrival period T81 and the first opening time T83 can be set short. Thereby, it is easier to close the upper movable plate 8511 that has started switching (opening) to the retracted state at the first opening time T83 (switching to the projecting state) before the trailing ball reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. Can be done (in time).

  On the other hand, since the load (braking force) applied to ball P82 from contact portion 3363 is smaller than the load (braking force) applied to ball P81 from contact portion 3363, ball P82 reaches lower bottom opening 8313b. After that, the time until the arrangement of the spheres becomes stable can be made longer compared to the sphere P81. Thereby, it is possible to improve the freedom of the effect performed by using the period until the arrangement of the balls P <b> 82 is stabilized. For example, effects can be performed for a long time.

  The waveform illustrated as the lower movable plate 8512 illustrates the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 from the opening time of the V winning device 800 . Although the waveforms of the timing chart of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 show changes in state, they are simplified and illustrated as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

  At the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T83. Therefore, if at least one ball enters the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted at the first opening time T83, and the ball entered at the head falls from the lower bottom opening 8313b. And the V winning switch 8315 d and then the discharge switch 8315 e.

  At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the projecting state at the first opening time T83 and the second opening time T84. Therefore, the ball which falls from the lower bottom opening 8313b by the upper movable plate 8511 being retracted is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, so it does not pass the V prize switch 8315d and is discharged. Pass the switch 8315 e.

  At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state at the first opening time T83, and the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the second opening time T84. Therefore, when there is one ball entering the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted at the first opening time T83, and the ball entering at the head is from the lower bottom opening 8313b. As it falls and is guided along the lower movable plate 8512 to the second groove 8315b, the ball passes the discharge switch 8315e without passing through the V pay switch 8315d.

  On the other hand, when there are two or more balls entering the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted at the second opening time T84, and the ball falls from the lower bottom opening 8313b, The V winning switch 8315 d is passed, and then the discharging switch 8315 e is passed.

  As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given to the player clearly changes depending on whether one ball or a plurality of balls are put in the V winning hole 800a. It is defined in advance that when the V winning device 800 opens, it attempts to enter the ball at an early timing, but attempts to enter the ball at a late timing, but the timing to reach the inclined channel 8313 is included in the first arrival period T81. As is apparent from the above, the game property in which the profit given to the player is changed by the timing of entering the V winning hole 800a is clearly different.

  According to the game characteristics of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player changes depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a in one opening operation of the V winning device 800. The ability to pay attention to the manner of entering the ball can be improved.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described where the ball reaching the lower bottom opening 8313b when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the projecting state is parked on the upper side of the upper movable plate 8511, but the delay device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is the upper The movable plate 8511 is provided with a discharge detection port 9313a for discharging the ball that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b when the movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 55, the configuration of delay device 9300 in which the ball having passed V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 55 is a partial front view of the delay device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 9300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as in the third embodiment are given and the third embodiment Descriptions of parts that are the same as in the description of FIG.

  A delay device 9300 is provided as a device for forming a flow path through which a ball entering the V winning device 800 passes. The V prize winning apparatus 800 is provided with a V prize winning opening 800a, and when the gaming ball enters the V prize opening 800a, the entry of the gaming ball is detected, and a predetermined game is made for the player. A ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection opening that also serves as a detection sensor. In addition, a game ball having entered the V winning opening 800a passes a V winning switch 8315d described later, whereby a jackpot game is awarded.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d does not function as a detection port that performs detection accompanied by a lottery but functions as a detection port that purely detects passage of a sphere. That is, the number of balls detected by the V winning opening 800a and the number of balls detected by the detection opening 312d are collated, and if abnormality is recognized in the difference between the numbers, control is performed so as to notify an error. By doing this, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range on the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and make it easy to find an irregularity in which a ball is directly inserted into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the delay device 9300 flows down the inside of the main body member 9310 in the same manner as the main body member 9310 which causes the ball entered into the V winning hole 800a to flow down and the delay device 8300 described in the eighth embodiment. The stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action of the ball, and when the stop device 3340 changes, the state is maintained and the action of the ball flowing down the inside causes the posture change of the stop device 3340 A maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state and a retention device 8500 for acting on a ball flowing down an attachment groove 8315 described later to retain the ball are mainly provided. That is, the delay device 9300 of this embodiment is different from the delay device 8300 of the eighth embodiment only in the main body members 8310 and 9310, and has the same configuration in the other parts.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the main body member 9310 has a first groove 3311, a second groove 3312, a branch delay groove 8314, and a lower bottom opening 8313b, which have the same structure as the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment. An installation groove 8315 mainly composed of a pair of grooves extending vertically downward from the area including and being arranged side by side is mainly provided, and in addition, the configuration is different from the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment And an inclined channel 9313. That is, the main body member 9310 of the present embodiment is different from the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment only in the inclined channels 8313 and 9313, and the other portions have the same configuration.

  The first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 9313, the branch delay groove 8314 and the juxtaposed groove 8315 have a groove shape having an opening at the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the opening is By being closed to the board 13, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

  The inclined flow passage 9313 is formed as a straight flow passage which inclines downward as it goes to the right starting from the lower end of the second groove 3312, and the ball in contact with the contact portion 3363 is further advanced by two balls It is a flow path extended to the end (in the flow path where the third ball counts from the extended end when it comes in contact with the contact portion 3363 when three balls stay from the extended end) A lower bottom opening 8313 b disposed at the same position as the eighth embodiment, and a position deviated by one ball along the extending direction of the inclined channel 9313 with respect to the lower bottom opening 8313 b In the extended end portion of the inclined channel 9313), a discharge detection port 9313a mainly opened so as to guide the ball to the back side (the back side in FIG. 55). The inclined flow passage 9313 is formed in a shape in which four seconds elapse from when the ball passes the V winning opening 800a to when it flows down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  The discharge detection port 9313a is an opening that guides the ball that has reached the front side (the front side in the vertical direction in FIG. 55) and guides the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown). The discharge detection port 9313a is configured as a switch (part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4)) that detects passage of a ball.

  The balls having flowed down the inclined channel 9313 and having passed through the lower bottom opening 8313 b flow down the alignment groove 8315. In the present embodiment, the formation of the communication opening 8313a is omitted, so the second groove 8315b of the juxtaposed groove 8315 is formed as a groove in which the ball is guided only via the first groove 8315a.

  That is, the juxtaposed groove 8315 includes a first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower bottom opening 8313b, a second groove 8315b juxtaposed to the left of the first groove 8315a, and a second groove from the first groove 8315a. A gap 8315c formed as a gap through which the ball can pass to 8315b, a V prize switch 8315d disposed so that the ball can pass downstream of the gap 8315c of the first groove 8315a, and the first groove 8315a or And a discharge switch 8315e through which the ball having flowed down the second groove 8315b passes.

  The ball which has flowed down the delay device 9300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315 e.

  The flow-down mode of the ball that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313 b will be described. First, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the projecting state when the ball reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b, the ball does not stay at the lower bottom opening 8313b and continues to flow down along the same flowing direction, and the discharge detection port After reaching the front side of 9313a, it passes through the discharge detection port 9313a and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state when the ball reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b, the ball passes through the lower bottom opening 8313b and drops, and then, the parallel formation is performed along the first groove 8315a The ditch 8315 starts to flow down. After flowing down the parallel groove 8315, the ball passes through the discharge switch 8315e and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  As described above, when the ball flowing down the inclined flow passage 9313 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313 b, the flow path of the ball after that can be made different depending on whether the upper movable plate 8511 is in the projecting state or the retracted state. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner as to cause the lower movable plate 8512 to move up and down in a constant operation pattern from the time of power-on. In this embodiment, as an example different from the eighth embodiment, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the projecting state (the state in which the passage of the ball is restricted) for 5.5 seconds, and then the retracted state (the passage in the ball is permitted). The lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven in an operation pattern which repeats maintaining for 0.5 seconds. Next, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing an example of operation of each part when a ball entering the V winning hole 800a is detected, and an example of an operation mode of each part. In FIG. 56, the waveform is illustrated in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of V winning opening 800a is turned ON indicates the timing at which the ball has passed V winning opening 800a.

  The waveform illustrated as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for ease of understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the balls P91 and P92 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. It is illustrated in an aspect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and becomes a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. Thus, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In FIG. 56, the case where two balls P91 and P92 pass through the V winning hole 800a is shown. That is, the balls P91 and P92 are illustrated as balls that have passed through the V winning opening 800a at a pitch interval of 1.8 seconds or less.

  Among the balls entering the V winning opening 800a, the ball P91 entering at the head changes the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the change state, and then flows down the inclined flow path 9313. After stopping device 3340 changes to a changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds (longer than the opening time of V winning device 800) until the maintenance of that state is canceled by the action of ball P91. P92 enters the branch delay groove 8314 while in contact with the stop device 3340 in the changed state.

  In this manner, the ball P91 entering at the head and the ball P92 following the trailing flow down another channel to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. The time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313 b can be defined by the flow path shape. In the present embodiment, the ball P91 takes 4 seconds until it reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b after passing through the V winning hole 800a, and the ball P92 is added by flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 (5 seconds) It takes 9 seconds.

  The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first arrival period T81 which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened The spheres P91 and P92 can not reach the lower bottom opening 8313b in a period other than the second reaching period T82. In addition, the first reaching period T81 and the second reaching period T82 are separated.

  That is, the timing at which the sphere P91 and the sphere P92 reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be clearly divided. That is, depending on the timing at which the ball enters the V winning opening 800 a during the opening period of the V winning device 800, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player changes. It is possible to form a case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls enter the V winning opening 800a during the open period of the game.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 56 is illustrated with the point at which the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched from the projecting state to the retracted state (opened) at a first opening time T93 after 9 seconds from the opening time of the V prize device 800, and switched from the retracted state to the projecting state after 2 seconds ( Closed). The first opening time T93 is defined from before the ball entering timing regardless of the ball entering timing to the V winning opening 800a.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the first opening time T93 corresponds to the beginning of the second reaching period T82. Therefore, even when the ball P92 enters the V prize opening 800a while the V prize apparatus 800 is open, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the retracted state at the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. be able to.

  On the other hand, since upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in a projecting state during a period corresponding to first reaching period T81, when ball P91 enters V prize opening 800a while V prize device 800 is open, Even if it is, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the projecting state at the timing when the ball P91 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P91 entering the V winning opening 800a at the beginning from entering the installation groove 8315, and opening the same as the opening of the V winning device 800 when the ball P91 enters the V winning opening 800a. In the inside, the ball P92 entering the V winning hole 800a after the ball P91 entering the V winning hole 800a can be guided to the arrangement groove 8315. Thereby, during a single opening of V winning device 800, ball P91 is opened during the same opening as compared to the profit given to the player by ball P91 entering the top of V winning opening 800a at the beginning. By the ball P92 entering the V winning hole 800a later, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player is larger. In other words, it is possible to prevent the ball P91 from passing through the V pay switch 8315d and to configure a gaming machine in which the ball P92 can pass through the V pay switch 8315d.

  For this purpose, it is necessary to avoid that the ball P91 collides with the extending end of the inclined flow path 9313 and bounces back, and the ball P91 is returned to the lower bottom opening 8313b. In the present embodiment, the ball P91 can be decelerated by the braking action generated by the contact (scrub) between the ball P91 and the contact portion 3363. Therefore, even if the ball P91 flows vigorously through the inclined channel 9313 The ball P 91 can be prevented from colliding with the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313 and returning to the lower bottom opening 8313 b. Therefore, the setting range of the inclination angle of the inclined flow passage 9313 becomes the side where the inclination angle based on the horizontal surface becomes larger (the speed of the ball flowing down the inclined flow passage 9313 becomes faster until reaching the contact portion 3363) Side can be extended.

  The braking action of the ball P91 utilizes the contact between the ball P91 and the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 disposed to release the maintenance of the stopping device 3340 in the changed state. It is not a thing to add a new braking device. That is, in the present embodiment, the maintenance device 3360 can be used both for switching the state of the stopping device 3340 and for decelerating the ball P91.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the decelerating action that occurs in the trailing ball P92 as compared to the decelerating action that occurs in the foremost ball P91 due to the contact with the contact portion 3363.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, when the forefront ball P91 abuts on the abutting portion 3363, the distance between the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintaining device 3360 is shortened and a sufficient attracting force works. On the other hand, when the trailing ball P92 abuts on the contact portion 3363, the space between the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintaining device 3360 is made small, and the attraction force becomes weak. The load received by the contact portion 3363 can be made larger than the load received by the trailing ball P 92 from the contact portion 3363.

  Therefore, while decelerating the ball P91 sufficiently, it is possible to suppress the degree of deceleration of the ball P92 in comparison with the degree of deceleration of the ball P91. This makes it possible to smooth downflow of the inclined flow path 9313 of the ball P92, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of dissatisfaction from the player who visually follows the flow of the ball P92.

  For example, when the degree of deceleration of the ball P92 by the contact portion 3363 is large, when the ball flowing down the inclined channel 9313 starts to abut the contact portion 3363, although the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state, While the ball is in contact with the contact portion 3363 and decelerating, an event in which the lower movable plate 8512 is in a projecting state is apt to occur. In this case, the player has no grounds such as “I can generate wind internally and intentionally decelerate the ball P92 to make it difficult for the ball to pass the V prize switch 8315d.” It is easy for speculation to spread, and there is a risk of diminishing the player's willingness to play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball P92 capable of entering the arrangement groove 8315 is in contact with the contact portion 3363 as compared to the ball P91 which can not enter the arrangement groove 8315. Since the degree of deceleration can be reduced, the flow of the ball P92 near the contact portion 3363 can be smoothed to reduce the possibility of spreading unexplained speculation.

  Also, when the head ball P91 abuts on the contact portion 3363 and the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 are spaced apart, the contact portion 3363 is upward with the shaft portion 3361a as an axis. Rotate towards. Thereafter, the contact portion 3363 is lowered again to the position shown in FIG. 55 by gravity, but the time taken to reach the state shown in FIG. 55 changes due to the weight balance of the maintenance device 3360 and the like. That is, as the weight of the contact portion 3363 is lighter, the time taken to reach the state shown in FIG. 55 becomes longer.

  Here, if the ball P92 passes below the contact portion 3363 before reaching the state shown in FIG. 55 after the contact portion rotates upward, the ball P92 contacts the contact portion 3363. Because it is neither decelerated nor decelerated, it is possible to flow down the path to the lower bottom opening 8313 b purely according to the shape of the flow path (without being decelerated for other special reasons). In this case, it is easy to accurately set the period until the ball P92 entering the V winning hole 800a reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the balls P91 and P92 are separated and pass through the V prize opening 800a immediately after the opening and just before the closing in the single opening of the V winning device 800, the ball P92 continues to the ball P91. In the case of passing through the V winning opening 800a, the period until the ball P92 reaches the lower side of the contact portion 3363 after the contact portion 3363 is rotated upward by the contact with the ball P91 can be shortened. In this case, it is easy to create a situation in which the ball P92 does not contact the contact portion 3363 and flows down, so 9 seconds after the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b (9 seconds after entering the V winning opening 800a) Can be easily set by the flow passage shape of the main body member 9310.

  Therefore, when performing drive control of the retention device 8500 in consideration of the timing (see FIG. 56), the ball P92 and the ball P91 are connected to the ball P91 by entering the ball P92 into the V winning opening 800a. The maximum profit given to the player by the ball P92 (the ball P92 passes the V pay switch 8315d as compared to the case of entering the V winning opening 800a at intervals (about 1.8 seconds at the maximum). The player can easily get a jackpot).

  The waveform illustrated as the lower movable plate 8512 illustrates the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 from the opening time of the V winning device 800 . Although the waveforms of the timing chart of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 show changes in state, they are simplified and illustrated as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

  At the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the projecting state in two seconds from the first opening time T93, that is, in a period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls entering the V winning opening 800a, the ball is prevented from passing through the V winning switch 8315d, and the ball deviated from the V winning switch 8315d passes through the discharge switch 8315e.

  At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state until the end of the period when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, and the lower movable plate 8512 is at the end of the period when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. It is switched to the evacuation state. Therefore, as the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V prize opening 800a is closer to the switching timing of the V prize device 800 to the closed state, the ball P92 is more likely to flow down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The profit given to the player is increased.

  At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T93, so the lower movable plate 8512 is in the projecting state at least in the second half of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Maintained. Therefore, as the timing when the ball P92 enters the V prize opening 800a is closer to the switching timing of the V prize device 800 to the open state, the ball P92 is more likely to flow down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The profit given to the player is increased.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, only the ball P92 entering the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined flow passage 9313 when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. The timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower base opening 8313b and falls (the timing when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a) is well matched with the timing when the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state. Thus, it is possible to create a situation where the ball P92 passes the V winning switch 8315d.

  That is, the condition for passing the ball to the V winning switch 8315d is to pass two or more balls through the V prize opening 800a within the single opening operation of the V winning device 800, and the second ball has V timing with good timing. It can be two points of passing the mouth 800a.

  As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given to the player clearly changes depending on whether one ball or a plurality of balls are put in the V winning hole 800a. According to the game characteristics of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player changes depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a in one opening operation of the V winning device 800. The ability to pay attention to the manner of entering the ball can be improved. On the premise of this game property, an example of an effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 52) will be described as an effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit.

  In the third symbol display device 81, various effects related to the size of the jackpot expectation are performed in conjunction with the variable display. Here, the size of the jackpot expectation degree refers to the size of the probability that the ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a passes the V winning switch 8315d.

  For example, when the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruded state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, so the ball P92 can pass the V prize switch 8315d Sex is extremely low. Therefore, in this case, in the present embodiment, for example, by displaying characters such as "I do not expect" or "I'm off this time" on the third symbol display device 81, the player has an excessive expectation. It is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to give notification not to let it go. In addition, the method of alerting | reporting is not restricted to the display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. For example, it may be voiced from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, extremely short voices or voices of very common negative images may be produced), or the lamp display 227 The light may be emitted (for example, blue light may be generated in a setting where the degree of expectation is higher as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc.), or the movable mechanism near the third symbol display device 81 May be disposed according to the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in the operation mode in which the strength of the movement is provided with strength, the strength may be weakened).

  On the other hand, when the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the second timing and when it is operating at the third timing, the upper movable plate 8511 is ideally retracted in either of the cases. Since the ball P92 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b, there is a possibility that the ball P92 passes through the V pay switch 8315d. However, in the present embodiment of the game property in which the ball P 92 entering after the V prize winning opening 800 a passes the V prize winning switch 8315 d, a clear difference occurs in the jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as in the case of the conventional model, the ball emission interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest and the arrangement of the V winning opening 800a shown in FIG. The period until entering the ball does not change significantly from ball to ball. Since the interval at which the ball enters the V winning opening 800a also takes about 0.6 seconds as long as the firing interval is at least 0.6 seconds, it is assumed that the ball is opened immediately after the V winning apparatus 800 is opened. It is difficult for P92 to pass the V winning hole 800a.

  That is, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the jackpot expectation is larger than when operating the third movable timing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, notification is given that indicates that the big hit expectation is large, while the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing. Is controlled by the MPU 221 to give a notification indicating that the jackpot expectation is moderate as liveliness.

  For example, in the case where the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays characters such as “big chance” or “let's see it” to display the player Is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to give a notification to give the expectation of the jackpot. In addition, the method of alerting | reporting is not restricted to the display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. For example, it may be voiced from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, it may be a long version voice of an image song of that model, or a voice of a very common plus image). The light may be emitted from the lamp display device 227 (for example, red light may be generated in a setting where the degree of expectation becomes higher as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc.), or the third symbol A movable mechanism may be disposed in the vicinity of the display device 81, and the operation mode of the movable mechanism may be used (for example, in the operation mode in which the strength of the movement is provided with strength), the strength may be strengthened.

  On the other hand, for example, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as "there is something" or "I do not know until the end" are displayed on the third symbol display unit 81. Thus, the MPU 221 controls the notification so as to give the player some expectation. In addition, the method of alerting | reporting is not restricted to the display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. For example, it may be voiced from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, it may be a voice of a short version of an image song of that model, a voice of a very common intermediate image, etc.) The light may be emitted from the lamp display device 227 (for example, green light may be generated in a setting where the degree of expectation is higher as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc.), or the third symbol A movable mechanism may be disposed in the vicinity of the display device 81, and the operation mode of the movable mechanism may be used (for example, in the operation mode in which the strength of the movement is provided with strength), the strength may be moderate. .

  At another operation timing (a fourth timing not shown) of the lower movable plate 8512, a timing when the lower movable plate 8512 is retracted at the second timing and a timing when the lower movable plate 8512 is retracted at the third timing. In the meantime, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state.

  In this case, there is a possibility that the ball P92 passes the V prize switch 8315d by the ball P92 entering at an intermediate timing during the opening of the V prize device 800. On the other hand, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the ball P92 is disposed above the opening / closing plate of the V prize winning apparatus 800 in the open state, and it is not known when to enter the V prize opening 800a. Even if there is, since the ball P 92 can be forced to enter the V prize opening 800 a by the operation of the opening / closing plate accompanying the V prize device 800 switching to the closed state, the operation timing of the V prize device 800 can be used A situation in which the ball P92 passes through the V pay switch 8315d can be easily formed.

  Therefore, as another example (or an example to be added) of the above notification, the operation timing when the lower movable plate 8512 is retracted when the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing. Among them, it may be set as the case where the jackpot expectation is the largest, and notification corresponding to that may be performed.

  For example, as another example in the case where the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as “big hit confirmed?” And “congratulations” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 221 controls the notification so as to give the player the maximum expectation of the jackpot. In addition, the method of alerting | reporting is not restricted to the display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. For example, it may be voiced from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, it may be a voice of a definite tone of the model, etc.) or light from the lamp display 227 Good (for example, the degree of expectation is higher as the color changes to blue, green, red, and rainbow color may generate rainbow light emission in the setting where the big hit is confirmed, etc.), and the third symbol display device 81 The movable mechanism may be disposed nearby and the operation mode of the movable mechanism may be used (for example, in the operation mode in which the strength of the movement is provided with strength, the strength may be the strongest).

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 is provided on the slide moving member 321 so as to protrude to the inside of the first groove 311 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a mode in which a pair of wall portions constituting an S-shaped path is disposed on the slide moving member 321, and the S-shaped path in which a ball flows down into the first groove 311 is produced by moving the slide moving member 321. It may be composed of In this case, since the path in which the ball flows can be made longer by the pair of wall portions, the decelerating effect can be continued for a long period of time as compared with the convex portion 321a1 reducing the decelerating effect due to wear. . In addition, the slide moving member 321 may be configured in a mode in which the area where the convex portion 321a1 is formed and the area where the S-shaped path is formed are connected.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 protruding to the inside of the first groove 311 is moved by the kinetic energy of the ball has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the convex portion 321a1 is moved by the driving force of the driving motor constantly at a constant operation, and the state in which the first groove 311 projects inward (the state in which the degree of deceleration becomes large) and the state in which it retracts from the first groove 311 (A state in which the degree of deceleration decreases) may be switched (may function as a reduction gear in a constant operation). In this case, the degree of deceleration of the ball flowing down the first groove 311 can be changed according to the drive pattern of the drive motor.

  In addition, the above-described constant-speed reduction gear may be disposed, for example, in the post-detection flow passage 5313 in the fifth embodiment. In this case, the period required for the sphere passing through the detection port 312d to pass through the flow path 5313 after detection can be changed according to the state of the reduction gear, so the stopping device 3340 is maintained in a changed state. The period can have variations. Describing in detail, when the reduction gear retracts from the flow path 5313 after detection (same as the state of only the flow path 5313 after detection), it takes the sphere passing through the detection port 312d to pass the flow path 5313 after detection Compared to the period, the period required for the sphere passing through the detection port 312d to pass through the post-detection flow path 5313 can be extended when the reduction gear is in a state of projecting inside the post-detection flow path 5313. Therefore, at the time when the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64, the state of the reduction gear when the ball P51 passes the detection port 312d changes, and the ball P51 passes the flow path 5313 after detection. Since the period changes, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns of periods in which the stopping device 3340 is maintained in a changed state, by the difference in the timing when the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 of the reduction gear 320 projects upward is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an aspect in which the convex portion 321a1 protrudes downward to the inside of the first groove 311 or an aspect in which the convex portion 311a1 protrudes to the inside of the first groove 311 may be configured. In this case, it is possible to prevent the slide moving member 321 from moving outward of the first groove 311 by the weight of the ball.

  In the first embodiment, even in the case where the balls P1 and P2 enter the distributing device 340 in the initial state in a row and enter, the balls P1 and P2 are configured to be able to be distributed. It is not a thing. For example, after the interval loading means for ensuring the interval between the connected balls to be opened reliably before the balls reach the distributing device 340, the state of the distributing device 340 after a while after the balls enter the distributing device 340 May be configured in a manner that changes. In this case, since it is not necessary to strictly manage the timing of the state change of the distribution device 340, the distribution device 340 can be loosely supported, and the load required for the state change can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the part of the sorting device 340 that the ball collides with is formed of an arc shape (arc wall portion 343) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be configured from a flat plate-like portion of a portion corresponding to the arc wall portion 343. In this case, when the ball enters the distributing device 340 while the distributing device 340 returns to the initial state, the distributing device 340 is rotated by the load applied from the ball and returned to the changed state. Thereby, the period during which the distribution device 340 is maintained in the changed state can be extended.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 is caused to return by the change of the center of gravity has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the sorter 340 is returned using a product in which the biasing force changes according to the movement direction (a movement resistance is applied only in 1 direction) or a cylinder product in which the movement resistance is changed for each direction using an orifice. You may operate it. In this case, maintainability can be improved by using a commercially available product. In addition, the rotational resistance of the rotation shaft of the distribution device 340 is configured to be small in the forward rotation and large in the reverse rotation, thereby applying a constant biasing force to the distribution device 340 to allow time for the return operation of the distribution device 340 It can cause a delay.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the spheres flowing from the fan-shaped member 410 into the inflow port 435 is guided by the delay channel 436 is not limited thereto. For example, by forming another floor surface below the inlet 435 (by forming a two-tiered floor on which the balls can roll), the sphere that has flowed from the fan-like member 410 into the inlet 435 is once again the floor The surface may be rolled to enter the first winning opening 64. In this case, since the period in which the ball rolls on the floor surface can be extended, the player can pay attention to the movement of the ball and the period in which the ball stops striking can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to absorb the fluctuation of the winning portion held in the meantime, and to suppress the occurrence of the overflow.

  Although the case where the fan-shaped member 410 leans in the state which followed the left-right direction in the said 1st Embodiment was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the rotary shaft may be inclined in a state in which it is aligned in the front-rear direction. In this case, the ball can be dropped toward the first winning opening 64 along the inclination of the arc portion of the fan-shaped member 410 (the position in the left-right direction can be corrected).

  Although the case where the fan-shaped member 410 operates with the weight of a ball was described in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be configured to be electrically operated in a constant repetitive operation mode. In this case, a plurality of types of combinations of operations of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 can be configured. For example, a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side is in a raised state and a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is in a reclining position, and a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side is lifted A state in which the member 410 is in a raised posture, a state in which the front fan 410 is in a lying posture and a state in which a rear fan 410 is in a lying posture, and the front fan 410 is in a lying posture It is possible to configure a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is in a raised state and the posture in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is raised.

  Although the case where a pair of fan-shaped members 410 were comprised from the same shape was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, compared with the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side, the fan-shaped member on the back side may be configured to be longer in width in the left-right direction. In this case, the action associated with the inclination of the fan-like member (the action of push-back) is also applied to a ball disposed at a position separated from the center position of the fan-like member 410 in the lateral direction and above the fan-like member on the back side. Can be generated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the outlet of the delay passage 436 is displaced in the lateral direction with respect to the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the delay flow paths 436 below the pair of left and right inflow ports 435 may be joined at the center in the left and right, and the outlet thereof may be disposed right above the first winning opening 64. In this case, it is possible to improve the rate at which the balls discharged into the game area from the outlet of the delay flow path 436 enter the first winning opening 64.

  In the first embodiment, the initial state and the change state of the distribution device 340 are described as one of the postures of the distribution device 340, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the initial state is a posture in which the ball reaching the distribution device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341, and the change state is a posture in which the ball reaching the distribution device 340 is thrown to the third groove 313, The state may be defined by the function of the distribution device 340. In the first embodiment, the ball can be received by the first wall portion 341 only in the initial state of the distributing device 340, and the ball which has reached the distributing device 340 between the initial state and the change state is exclusively the third groove 313. Because the ball is thrown into the ball (dimension relation), the distribution device 340 changes state even if the definition of the initial state and the change state is performed by the function or even if it is performed as one of the postures. The time required to return to the initial state can be the same. The same applies to the distribution device 2340 and the stop device 3340 in the above embodiments.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls of a 1st special symbol is 3 or 4 is 3 seconds, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 3 is set to 5 seconds, and the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 4 is set to 3 seconds. It may be done. In this case, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 while the variable display of the first special symbol is three during the number of holding balls is continuing the detection opening 312d before the ongoing variable display is ended. Passing can occur (the number of holding balls will be 4). On the other hand, since the ball-to-ball interval between subsequent balls is 3 seconds or more, and the fluctuation display when the number of holding balls is 4 is 3 seconds, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 after that is detected Prior to passing through the mouth 312d, the ongoing variation can be ended to make room in the storage area.

  In the first embodiment, after the ball rolling on the delay floor device 400 and falling from the chamfered portion 411a, the ball entering the delay floor device 400 after falling from the chamfered portion 411a is the fan-shaped member 410 Although the case where it pushed back temporarily by operating was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be driven regardless of the falling of the ball, and in one state in operation, the ball entering the delay device 400 later may be temporarily stopped. In this case, all spheres entering the delay device 400 can be given the possibility of temporarily staying on the delay device 400.

  Although the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the first winning opening 64 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the delay device 300 may be connected to the second winning opening 640.

  In the first embodiment, the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d after the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d. By setting the time longer than the time to pass 312 d, after the sphere P1 passes the detection opening 312 d, the possibility of the sphere P 2 passing the detection opening 312 d before the end of the variation display of the first symbol Has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection opening 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection opening 312d, and a period from when the sphere P2 passes through the detection opening 312d to when the sphere P3 passes through the detection opening 312d And may be set to substantially the same length. In this case, since the hold display of the first symbol occurs with substantially the same period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Also, for example, during a period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection opening 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection opening 312d, the sphere P2 passes through the detection opening 312d until the sphere P3 passes through the detection opening 312d The period may be set to be longer. In this case, since the ball P2 passes through the detection port 312d at an early stage, it is easy to increase the number of holding balls when the ongoing fluctuation ends, and the duration of the subsequent fluctuation display is shortened. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the occurrence of an overflow at the first winning opening 64 due to the subsequent ball entry.

  In the first embodiment, when the number of holding balls in the first winning opening 64 is four, the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected is set to 3 seconds, and the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected when the number of holding balls is one is mentioned Although the case where it did not do was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, when the number of holding balls in the first winning opening 64 is one, the variation period that is easy to be selected is 10 seconds, and in the case of two, the variation period that is easy to be selected is six seconds, three or four A likely change period may be set to 3 seconds.

  In this case, when the ball is fired so as to cause the ball to enter the first winning opening 64 when the number of holding balls in the first winning opening 64 is three (a variable display when the number of holding balls is three is executed) Before the ball P1 passes through the detection opening 312d, the variation display in the case of the number of holding balls being three ends, the number of holding balls being two The variable display in case of is started.

  While the variable display in the case where the number of holding balls is two is performed (6 seconds, ie, less than 9 seconds after entering the ball), the ball P3 does not pass through the detection port 312d. Therefore, since the sphere P3 can be made to pass through the detection port 312d after the end of the current fluctuation, the spheres P1 to P3 are detected in the three storage areas secured by the end of the current fluctuation. Data obtained by passing 312 d can be stored.

  Thus, under the condition that the fluctuation period which is easy to be selected is 3 seconds when the number of holding balls is 3 or 4, the fluctuation period when the number of holding balls is 2 is 7.5 seconds. (The ball P3 passes the detection port 312d even if the ball P1 enters the first winning opening 64 and variation display (3 seconds) is started when the number of balls held is three at the same time as the ball P1 enters the first winning opening 64 (10.5 Even after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 three times in a row, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an overflow at the first winning opening 64 by setting the fluctuation period in which the fluctuation ends before the second). it can.

  In addition, when the ball is fired so as to cause the first winning opening 64 to enter the ball when the number of holding balls in the first winning opening 64 is two (after the variable display when the number of holding balls is two is performed In the case where the ball is made to enter the first winning opening 64), variation after the ball P1 passes the detection opening 312d and the number of holding balls is two before the ball P2 passes the detection opening 312d The display is ended, and the variable display is started again in the case where the number of holding balls is 2 (after the number of holding balls has been increased by entering the ball P1). Thereafter, since the spheres P2 and P3 can pass through the detection port 312d, the data acquired by passing the spheres P2 and P3 through the detection port 312d is stored in the remaining two storage areas. Can.

  In addition, when firing the ball so as to cause the ball to enter the first winning opening 64 when the number of holding balls of the first winning opening 64 is one, the balls P1 to P3 pass the first winning opening 64 Since the area for storing data acquired by the above is sufficiently vacant, it is possible to store the data acquired when the spheres P1 to P3 pass through the detection port 312d without any problem.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 with the number of holding balls in the first winning opening 64 being three or less, the occurrence of an overflow at the first winning opening 64 is suppressed However, the effect of suppressing the overflow is not generated even when the first winning opening 64 is entered with the number of holding balls of the first winning opening 64 being four (maximum).

  Although the case where the posture of the stopping device 3340 is maintained by the magnetic force has been described in the third embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the locking member protrudes from the lower surface of the first wall 341, and the protruding end is bent toward the center hole 345, and the end of the main body bar 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 is bent downward. The bent portions may be hooked to each other to maintain the posture of the stopping device 3340. In this case, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in a changed state regardless of the magnitude of the load applied to the stop device 3340.

  Although the case where the second groove 4312 is extended in the vertical direction has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second groove 4312 may be inclined in the front-rear direction immediately before the sprocket 4340 (immediately on the upstream side). In this case, even if the number of balls staying above the sprocket 4340 is increased, the load applied to the sprocket from the ball can be reduced, and problems such as rotation defects of the sprocket 4340 can be suppressed. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is a win at approximately 1/1 regardless of the gaming state has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be about 1/10 during the normal period, and the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be about 1/1 during the definite change.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the plurality of balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed at the timing when the backtracking balls P52 to P53 pass through the second detection port 5314c. Although the case has been described where the first special symbol is displayed on hold, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when there is a ball (a ball waiting for passing) after entering the first winning opening 64 and before passing through the second detection port 5314c If there is a vacancy in the reserved display area of (when the ongoing fluctuation is finished), the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in advance even before the ball waiting for passage passes through the second detection port 5314c. The hold display may be performed in such a manner as to fill the empty area of the hold display of the first special symbol to be played.

  In this case, although there is a ball waiting for passing, a vacancy occurs in the hold display of the first special symbol regardless of it, and the player who visually recognizes it starts a new ball toward the first winning opening 64. After passing, the ball waiting for passing passes through the second detection port 5314c, so that the vacant area of the suspension display is filled, and eventually, even if the newly launched ball enters the first winning opening 64, the first special symbol It is possible to prevent giving the player the disadvantage that the variable display is not executed.

  Although the said 5th Embodiment demonstrated the case where the ball | bowl which passed the retention apparatus 5500 passes the 2nd detection opening 5314c immediately after that, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the ball that has passed through the retention device 5500 may pass through a member that can make the flow of the ball uneven, such as a crowne, before passing through the second detection port 5314c. In this case, it is possible to vary the period from when the ball passes through the retention device 5500 until it passes through the second detection port 5314c, and secures the randomness of the timing when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c. can do. In addition, a member such as a crane may be disposed on the upstream side of the retention device 5500.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the release from the change state of the stopping device 3340 is performed by the action of the ball entering at the beginning, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, release from the change state of the stop device 3340 may be performed by a follow-on ball. Thus, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state until the follow-up ball enters the first winning opening 64.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the continuous passage groove 5314 is extended to the right, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the continuous passage groove 5314 may be extended to the back side. In this case, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is disposed on the upstream side of the retention device 5500, and the ball is discharged from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 when the flow-down frequency of the balls directed to the retention device 5500 becomes excessive. Although the case where it is possible to prevent the ball clogging (for example, the ball staying up to the first winning opening 64) can be prevented by being carried out, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a mode in which the ball partially protrudes at the inside of the flow path on the upstream side of the retaining device 5500, a sprocket capable of arranging a ball at each angular position may be disposed and rotationally driven at a constant speed. In this case, since the balls flowing down toward the retaining device 5500 can be accommodated at each angular position until the sprocket is full, ball clogging can be prevented. In addition, the rotating shaft of a sprocket is not limited at all. For example, it may rotate around an axis extending along the front-rear direction, or may rotate around an axis extending along the vertical direction.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the pair of movable plate portions 6510 is operated by the pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 independently driven, and the flow-down mode of the ball flowing down the stopping portion 6314b is changed for each period. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of movable plate portions 6510 may be operated in such a manner that the flow-down mode of the ball flowing down the stopping portion 6314b is always constant. In this case, it is possible to easily grasp the flow-down mode of the ball.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the chain opening period T6a is set for 30 seconds, and the upper closing period T6b is set for 1⁄5 of 6 seconds, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, while the chain opening period T6a is set at 6 seconds, the upper closing period T6b may be set at 30 times the 5 times that. In this case, since the period in which the balls stay on the upper surface of the upper movable plate 6511 can be extended, it becomes easy to increase the number of stayings, and it becomes easy to pass the balls through the third detection port 5314e. In the gaming state in which the ball is fired toward the winning opening 64, it is possible to realize the gaming property in which the electric role thing 640a opens frequently.

  In the modification of the sixth embodiment, the case where the retaining portion 6314b2 has a size capable of accommodating two balls has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, three or four pieces may be accommodated. Also, the way of storing the ball is not limited to being clogged vertically. For example, the stationary portion may be a laterally long area and the spheres may be arranged sideways, or the aspect similar to the funnel may be configured such that the arrangement space of the spheres is narrowed toward the bottom.

  In the modification of the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls retained on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 is limited to one by providing the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 has been described, but it is not always necessary to It is not limited. For example, the formation of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 may be omitted. In this case, the upper limit of the number of balls retained above the upper movable plate 6511 can be removed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment and the modification of the sixth embodiment, the retention devices 5500, 6500, 6500b are arranged in one of the flow paths branched downstream of the first winning opening 64. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, and 6500b may be disposed on the upstream side of the branch point (the connection point between the second groove 5312 and the continuous passage grooves 5314 and 6314) downstream of the first winning opening 64. In this case, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is stopped by the stopping device 5500, 6500, 6500b, and the player can visually recognize the stopped ball through the glass unit 16. Even if it is not possible to determine at a glance whether the ball has won at the first winning opening 64 or not at the upstream side of the game ball, whether or not there is a ball held by the stopping device 5500, 6500, 6500b By confirming whether the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 can be grasped. In this case, it is not necessary to form a branch flow channel on the downstream side of the retention device 5500, 6500, 6500b. That is, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b may be disposed in the middle of the flow path formed by a single path from the first winning opening 64 to the ball discharge path (not shown).

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the stopping device 3340 returns to the initial state by the action of the flowing ball has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, if the ball is not in contact with the stopping device 3340 for a certain period of time after being changed, the state may be returned to the initial state. In this case, if the ball continues to abut on the stopping device 3340 at a constant time interval, the ball can be continuously kept entering the continuous passage groove 7314. In addition, after the stop device 3340 is changed, recovery may be started in a fixed time.

  In the seventh embodiment described above, the case where the length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detection opening 5314c is longer than the length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection opening 312d has been described. It is not limited to For example, when the length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection opening 312d and the length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detection opening 5314c are set to be the same, the ball flows down to the detection opening 312d. The flow path may be designed such that the flow resistance when the ball flows down to the second detection port 5314 c is larger than the flow resistance. In this case, it is possible to define the passage order of the balls while suppressing the arrangement space of the flow path.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the load applied from the contact portion 3363 to the ball is in the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower surface of the contact portion 3363 may be configured to be inclined upward to the back side. In this case, the load applied to the ball from the contact portion 3363 can include a directional component along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed and a directional component facing the back.

  In this case, depending on the magnitude of the load applied to the ball from the contact portion 3363, the ball may easily flow down continuously in the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed, or the ball may flow down the back side It becomes possible to change the

  For example, when the stopping device 3340 changes and the contact resistance between the contact portion 3363 and the ball abuts when the movement resistance of the contact portion 3363 is increased due to the adsorption force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362, adsorption of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 is performed. Since a large amount of energy is consumed for peeling off and the ball decelerates rapidly, the speed in the extension direction of the inclined channel 8313 becomes extremely small, and the ball follows the inclination of the abutting portion 3363 to be abutted. It flows to the back side and flows down the second groove 8315 b from the communication opening 8313 a.

  On the other hand, for example, when the stop device 3340 rotates from the change state, the attraction force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 becomes weak, and the contact portion 3363 and the ball come into contact when the movement resistance of the contact portion 3363 is weakened. In this case, since the decelerating action applied to the ball is reduced by the load from the contact portion 3363, the ball flows down along the extending direction of the inclined flow passage 8313 while pushing away the contact portion 3363. Therefore, the ball reaches the lower bottom opening 8313 b and starts to flow down the first groove 8315 a.

  Therefore, when the balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a in a row, the leading ball P81 flows down the second groove 8315b, while the trailing ball P82 is disposed in the first groove 8315a (the V winning switch 8315d is disposed). Can be made to flow down. Thereby, regardless of the operation mode of the retaining device 8500, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V prize switch 8315d when there is only one ball passing through the V prize opening 800a.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V winning device 800 may be opened for 0.5 seconds, 1.0 seconds, and 1.8 seconds. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not a plurality of balls easily pass the V prize opening 800a by the length of the open period of the V prize device 800, and to make the ball pass attention by the aspect that the ball passes the V prize opening 800a. .

  In this case, control may be performed to set the length of the open period of the V prize apparatus 800 depending on whether or not the ball can pass the V prize switch 8315 d by passing a plurality of balls through the V prize opening 800a. . For example, if the ball can pass the V prize switch 8315d by passing a plurality of balls through the V prize opening 800a, the open period of the V prize device 800 will be 0.5 seconds with a probability of 80%. The frequency of occurrence of the phenomenon that a plurality of balls pass the V prize opening 800a while making a situation that the balls pass the V prize switch 8315d if a plurality of balls pass the V prize opening 800a by controlling to Can be reduced. This makes it possible to create a game that the ball is likely to pass the V prize switch 8315 d and does not actually pass.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, when it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not a plurality of balls pass the V prize switch 8315 d when a plurality of balls do not enter the V prize device 800. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a plurality of LEDs in the extending direction of the attachment groove 8315 and emitting light of those LEDs in order, control is performed to show the arrangement of the balls flowing down when the balls enter the V winning hole 800a. It is also possible to make it possible to grasp the arrangement of the flowing balls when the balls enter the V winning opening 800 a by visually recognizing the LEDs that emit light. In this case, for example, even if a plurality of balls do not enter the V winning opening 800a, how light would flow if a plurality of balls entered the V opening 800a is determined by the light emission of the LED Since it can be informed and whether or not the ball has passed through the V prize switch 8315d can be informed, the player's interest (willingness to enter a plurality of balls into the V prize opening 800a) can be improved. It can be done.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, all balls flowing down the inclined channel 8313 abut against the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and the stop device 3340 can be returned from the change state to the initial state. It is not limited to this. For example, the contact portion 3363 may be disposed on the downstream side of the V pay switch 8315 d and the stop device 3340 may be returned from the change state to the initial state only when the ball passes the V pay switch 8315 d. In this case, after all the balls flowing down the main body member 8310 deviate from the V pay switch 8315 d and pass only the discharge switch 8315 e, the stopping device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even if only one ball enters the main body member 8310, the ball can flow into the branch delay groove 8314. Thus, for example, when the retaining device 8500 operates such that the ball which has flowed down the branch delay groove 8314 allows the opening / closing pattern of the V prize device 800 to pass the V prize switch 8315 d, the open time of the V prize device 800 Even if the control is made short (it is rare for two balls to enter), while the stopping device 3340 maintains the changing state, even if there is only one ball passing through the V winning opening 800a Since the ball can flow to the branch delay groove 8314, it is possible to create a situation where the ball passes the V pay switch 8315d. That is, after the opening operation of the V winning device 800 which has finished passing the ball without passing the V winning switch 8315 d, the ball entering the V winning opening 800 a when the V winning device 800 is opened again is the V winning switch 8315 d. The possibility of passing can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, only the first variable winning device 8065 is opened and closed in the big hit game, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the jackpot game, in addition to the first variable winning device 8065, the V winning device 800 may be opened and closed. In this case, the first variable prize device 8065 and the V prize device 800 are not simultaneously opened, and the number of big hit rounds in the big hit game is the opening operation of the first variable prize device 8065 and the V prize device 800 (constant opening and closing Set to match the total number of operations). In this case, the driving device 8520 performs different operations depending on the jackpot type, and the ball passes through the V prize switch 8315d during the jackpot game, and the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the jackpot game is over. It may be set. In addition, this high probability state may continue until the start of the next jackpot game, or may continue until the predetermined number of fluctuations of the first symbol (for example, the fluctuation of 100 times) end. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game, the gaming state may be reduced after the jackpot game is over.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<The second and subsequent balls are turned to another route and delayed to suppress the overflow>
In the first state in which the game ball enters the ball, and in the first state in which the game ball enters the ball in the first state, the game is switched to the game state even if the game ball enters the ball. In the gaming machine, provided with a detection entrance capable of constituting a second state in which the second state is not provided, and returning to the first state when a predetermined return period elapses after switching to the second state. , When entering a plurality of game balls, compare the period from the first game ball which is one game ball of the plurality of game balls enters the ball to the time the ball is thrown to the detection entrance And a delay means for delaying a period from when the second game ball, which is another game ball, enters the ball to sending the ball to the detection entrance, and the delay time by the delay means is longer than the return period A game machine A1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is obtained based on the entrance where the gaming ball enters the ball and the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance, and display means based on the information There is a gaming machine which displays dynamically (see, for example, JP-A-2011-156058). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store information acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entrance into a predetermined number (for example, four pieces), and it is not possible to store more than that. It is considered to be a configuration, but if a plurality of gaming balls enter the ball entrance at short intervals continuously, the upper limit of the number that can be stored will be reached (the second state will occur), and so-called overflow may occur. There was a problem. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to reduce the number of balls shot continuously, or to play while checking the number of stored information constantly, at the player's own discretion, which places a burden on the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, from the return period, the period from the first game ball entering the detection entrance to the second game sphere entering the detection entrance by the delay means. Since the second game ball is prevented from entering the detection entrance of the second state by being lengthened, the first game sphere enters the detection entrance and the detection entrance is in the second state. Even in the case where it becomes, it becomes possible to form a vacancy in the number that can be stored before the second gaming ball enters the detected entrance, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

  The period delayed by the delay means is at least longer than the period of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means such as a liquid crystal device, and the longest in the case where the number of memories of the information storage means is the upper limit value. It is desirable to be longer than the period of the dynamic display mode of

  The configuration of the delay means is not particularly limited, and various aspects can be considered. For example, a mode may be adopted in which the path in which the gaming balls flow down is distributed by the movable member, or a mode in which the flow paths in which the gaming balls flow down may be distributed in accordance with the relationship between the shape of the flow path and the ball collision.

  In the gaming machine A1, the delaying means distributes the gaming ball into a plurality of paths and passes the gaming ball through the distributing means for changing the attitude from the first attitude to the second attitude, and the distributing means. An urging means for generating an urging force to change the attitude from the second attitude to the first attitude, and guiding the first gaming ball having passed through the distributing means when the distributing means is in the first attitude The first guiding flow path for sending the ball to the ball opening and the second gaming ball which has passed through the distributing means during the time before the distributing means returns from the second attitude to the first attitude, and detects the ball entry opening And a second guiding flow path for throwing the ball to the second guiding flow path, and a period during which the second gaming ball passes through the second guiding flow path is compared with a period during which the first gaming ball passes through the first guiding flow path. And the delay period is Gaming machine A2, characterized in that it is configured as a difference between these periods.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the delaying means is the sorting means, the first guide flow path to which the game balls are distributed by the sorting means, the second guide flow path, and the distributing means. And a biasing means for returning the posture, and after that, compared with a period until the first gaming ball which has passed through the sorting means and is guided through the first guide flow path reaches the detection entrance. The period until the second gaming ball, which is passed through the sorting means and guided through the second guiding flow path by the biasing means immediately before returning to the first posture, can be extended by the biasing means until it reaches the detection entrance. Since the delay period is configured as a difference between these periods, it is ensured that the game ball will flow down compared to when the flow path of the game ball is randomly determined as when the game ball collides with the nail. Can be long, the game ball detected It can be shifted reliably the timing of reaching the sphere outlet.

  Further, since the attitude of the distributing means is returned by the urging means, the game balls are distributed to the case where the game balls reach the distributing means at intervals (when it is not necessary to delay the game balls that came later). It is possible to prevent the second guide channel from being distributed by the means.

  In the gaming machine A2, when the sorting means is in the first posture, a first wall facing the gaming ball in the flow-down direction and a gaming ball in contact with the first wall are used. And a second wall portion disposed at a sandwiching position, the second wall portion receiving a load along the flow-down direction from the gaming ball, the second attitude of the sorting means from the second attitude of the sorting means A game machine A3 characterized in that a posture change in a direction toward the posture is suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the second wall disposed at a position sandwiching the gaming ball colliding with the sorting means with the first wall is along the flow-down direction from the gaming ball By receiving the load, the attitude change of the sorting means in the direction from the second attitude to the first attitude is suppressed, so the game ball which has passed the sorting means earlier passes the sorting means later The action of the ball prevents the flow down and prevents the flow from being delayed.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the sorting means divides the gaming balls flowing down in series and includes dividing means for guiding only one ball to the first guide flow path, and the attitude changes due to the weight of the gaming balls A game machine A4 characterized in that the dividing means functions by changing the attitude of the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the balls flowing in series are divided by the dividing means of the distributing means, and a plurality of balls are guided in the first guide channel, This can be prevented without the addition of a drive source.

  The division means may be means for pushing the gaming balls toward the second guide flow path by protruding toward the inside of the flow path, or between the game balls connected by extending out toward the inside of the flow path. A means etc. which are inserted in between and cut game balls are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A4, the sorting means includes a first wall facing in the flow-down direction with respect to the gaming ball and the gaming ball being in contact with the first wall when the first attitude is taken. And a second wall portion disposed at a sandwiching position, and the second wall portion is moved in the moving direction to the second gaming ball when the distributing means changes its posture from the first posture to the second posture. A game machine A5 characterized in that the game ball is introduced into the second guide channel by collision.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, when the sorting means collides with the second gaming ball in the moving direction during attitude change, the game is performed between the sorting means and the first guide channel It is possible to prevent the sorting means from malfunctioning due to the ball being pinched.

  Here, for example, when the distributing means operates electrically, the distributing means operates regardless of the position of the game ball, so that the game ball is at a position deviated from the entrance of the second guide channel and the distributing means When the distribution means operates in a direction in which the distance between the distribution means and the side wall of the first guide flow channel is narrowed while being arranged at a position between the side walls of the first guide flow channel, the distribution means and the first There is a possibility that the game ball is caught between the guide channel and the distributing means may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A5, since the operation of the sorting device is not electric but caused by the weight of the gaming ball, the sorting means does not operate in a state where the sorting means causes malfunction due to the arrangement of the gaming balls. Thus, the positional relationship and the shape relationship can be designed in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the sorting means.

  In the gaming machine A5, when a plurality of gaming balls reach the sorting means and one of the gaming balls abuts the first wall, the other gaming ball abuts in the moving direction of the second wall. The first guiding flow is a side surface that forms an entrance from the one gaming ball and the second guiding flow passage in the connected ball introducing state in which the distributing means has changed its attitude to the first guiding flow A game machine A6 characterized in that the distance between the end faces with the downstream side face of the path and the distance along the extending direction of the first guide flow path is equal to or less than the radius of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the center of the other gaming ball is the second when the other gaming ball reaches the sorting means in a row with one gaming ball in the connected ball introduction state. The game ball can be pushed along the side surface of the second guide channel because it is disposed in the area inside the second guide channel when the guide channel is extended, and the game ball can be inserted into the second guide channel. It can be introduced.

  In the gaming machines A4 to A6, the distributing means performs a returning operation from the second attitude to the first attitude in a period longer than the returning period.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A4 to A6, the second gaming ball is surely prevented from entering the detection entry hole during the period of the second state. be able to.

  In the case where the dynamic display mode of the display device is a mode in which the short-term one is more easily selected as the number of memories of the detection entrance is larger, the length of the predetermined dynamic display mode is at least It is desirable that the length of the dynamic display mode is equal to or greater than the length of the shortest dynamic display mode when the memory number of the ball mouth is the upper limit.

<Overflow suppression by enabling the stage to operate with the weight of the ball>
In the first state in which the game ball enters the ball, and in the first state in which the game ball enters the ball in the first state, the game is switched to the game state even if the game ball enters the ball. In the gaming machine, provided with a detection entrance capable of constituting a second state in which the second state is not provided, and returning to the first state when a predetermined return period elapses after switching to the second state. A rolling means configured to have an optimal falling portion at which the gaming ball easily enters the detection entrance and a falling start position, and a rolling ball configured to roll on the upper surface in a manner that the gaming ball passes the optimal falling portion The rolling machine is operated in a mode in which the game balls are started to descend from the optimum dropping portion with an interval equal to or longer than the return period.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming ball has an optimum dropping portion disposed as a falling start portion which is easy to enter the detection entrance, and the gaming ball disposed on the upper surface is an optimum dropping portion There is a gaming machine provided with rolling means (so-called "stage") configured to be able to roll in a passing manner (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the second gaming ball rides on the rolling means before the first gaming ball on the rolling means descends from the rolling means, and the first gaming ball and the first gaming ball are first There is a problem that there is a possibility that an overflow may occur at the detection entrance when the two game balls may descend from the optimum dropping portion in a short period of time.

  This is different from a state in which the gaming balls run down while colliding with nails, and in the case where the gaming balls reciprocate in the left-right direction in a mode of passing the optimal dropping portion (the gaming balls reciprocate in a specific route) Is a unique problem on rolling means that is subject to frequent collisions.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the rolling means operates in such a mode that the game balls are started to descend one ball at a time from the optimum dropping portion, the game is detected in the detection entrance for a short period of time It is possible to prevent the balls from entering the ball together. Therefore, even when a plurality of gaming balls get on the rolling means, the occurrence of an overflow at the detection entrance can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine B1 includes an introduction channel for introducing a gaming ball to the rolling means, and the rolling means introduces the gaming ball from the introduction channel and guides the gaming ball to the optimum dropping portion. A floor member is provided, the first floor member being operatively formed by the weight of the rolling game ball, and the movement thereof reduces the speed toward the first floor member of the game ball which arrives later A game machine B2 characterized by operating in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, when the gaming ball is on the first floor member of the rolling means, the first floor member operates with the weight of the gaming ball, thereby making the game Since the speed of the ball directed to the first floor member can be reduced, the distance between the gaming ball on the first floor member and the gaming ball directed to the first floor member can be increased. This can suppress the occurrence of overflow at the detection entrance.

  In the case of reducing the speed of the game ball directed to the first floor member, for example, the case where the speed of the game ball directed to the first floor member is lowered (braking), or the case of stopping the game ball, The case where the game ball is moved in the reverse direction to the direction toward the first floor member (reverse run) is exemplified.

  Further, as a method of reducing the speed of the gaming ball toward the first floor member, for example, the method of setting the first floor member to be inclined downward in the direction away from the first floor member, the upper surface of the first floor member And the method of projecting a magnet to a position where the magnetic force can act on the game ball on the first floor member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the optimum dropping portion is disposed on the first floor member, and the first floor member is configured to operate when dropping a game ball from the optimum dropping portion, The moving means is placed in the vicinity of the first floor member before and after the game ball falls from the optimum drop portion, and the optimum drop of another game ball heading to the optimum drop portion within a predetermined period A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it comprises prevention means for preventing the arrival of a club.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2, the first floor member operates when the gaming ball falls from the optimal dropping portion, and the rolling means is the gaming ball from the optimal dropping portion Because it is placed on the first floor member before and after the falling and prevents the other game balls going to the optimal dropping part by the preventing means within a predetermined period, a plurality of gaming balls are introduced in series into the optimal dropping part Even in the case, it is possible to suppress that the other game balls fall continuously from the optimum drop portion after the foremost game ball is dropped from the optimum drop portion. This can suppress the occurrence of overflow at the detection entrance.

  In the gaming machine B3, the prevention means is capable of configuring the prevention state capable of preventing the game ball and the passage state in which the game ball can not be prevented, and the optimum immediately after the game ball falls from the optimum drop portion. As a state of the falling part, the game ball is dropped into the detection ball entrance in a mode in which the game ball falls easily in a mode in which the game ball easily enters the ball, and the game ball is entered into the detection ball opening in comparison with the suitable drop state. The normal falling state in which the game ball is dropped is configured in a manner that is difficult to be made, and the preventing means is in the preventing state when the preferable dropping state is made and the preventing means when the normal dropping state is made. Is in a passing state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the prevention means is in the prevention state when the optimum dropping portion is brought into the suitable dropping state, and the optimum dropping portion is brought into the normal dropping state. Since the prevention means is in a passing state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being prevented until the game ball falling from the optimal drop section does not enter the detection entrance, and the game ball is in the detection entrance It is possible to prevent the timing of entering the ball from being meaninglessly delayed.

  A game machine B5 characterized in that the game machine B3 or B4 includes a throwing means for throwing the game ball prevented by the prevention means away from the optimum dropping portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the movement of the gaming ball is made intense by throwing the gaming ball prevented by the preventing means by the throwing means away from the optimum dropping portion. Since it is possible to earn a period until the gaming ball reaches the optimum falling portion again, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow at the detected entrance while improving the player's interest.

  In any one of game machines B2 to B5, an intermediate floor member for introducing gaming balls to the first floor member is provided, and the intermediate floor member is operable, and the operation lowers in a direction away from the first floor member. A game machine B6 characterized in that the state of the intermediate floor member changes to an inclined state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the intermediate floor member is inclined downward in the direction away from the first floor member, so that the gaming ball reaches the intermediate floor member Gravity acceleration can be generated in a direction away from the first floor member. Therefore, it can suppress that the separation width of the game ball arrange | positioned on a 1st floor member and the game ball which reaches | attains an intermediate floor member from now on shrinks.

  In the gaming machine B6, the intermediate floor members are arranged in pairs on both sides of the first floor member, and a change in posture of the intermediate floor members is alternately generated in the pair of intermediate floor members.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the intermediate floor members are arranged in pairs on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture change of the intermediate floor members alternately occurs in the pair of intermediate floor members. When the game balls are directed to both of the pair of intermediate floor members, the timing at which the game balls are decelerated can be shifted, and the timing at which the game balls reach the first floor member can be shifted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball is congested in the vicinity of the optimum falling portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the reciprocation movement in the left and right direction is completed, the gaming ball having reached the optimum dropping portion, and the introduction passage to the first floor member A game machine B8 characterized in that it is configured in such a manner as to prevent a collision with a game ball flowing downward.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the reciprocation movement in the left and right direction has converged and the gaming ball has reached the optimum dropping portion and the passing passage And the game ball immediately before falling from the optimal drop section collides with another game ball and detects the ball entry opening because it is configured to prevent collision with the game ball flowing down toward the first floor member. It is possible to prevent the game balls falling in a direction away from each other and the passing game balls that collide with one another from passing through the detection entrance.

<Overflow suppression by decelerating the second and subsequent balls and shifting the winning timing>
In the first state in which the game ball enters the ball, and in the first state in which the game ball enters the ball in the first state, the game is switched to the game state even if the game ball enters the ball. In the gaming machine, provided with a detection entrance capable of constituting a second state in which the second state is not provided, and returning to the first state when a predetermined return period elapses after switching to the second state. When the plurality of game balls enter the ball, the flow-down speed of the second game ball entered after that as compared to the flow-down speed of the first game ball entered the first of the plurality of game balls And the game ball sent from the speed reduction means enters the detection entrance, and the second game ball enters the speed reduction means and then the detection enters. The time taken to enter the ball is the first game ball It said than this period until the ball entrance from the ball entrance to the detected incoming spherical opening to the deceleration means, the gaming machine C1, characterized in that is composed of long become manner than the length of the return period.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is obtained based on the entrance where the gaming ball enters the ball and the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance, and display means based on the information There is a gaming machine which displays dynamically (see, for example, JP-A-2011-156058). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store information acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entrance into a predetermined number (for example, four pieces), and it is not possible to store more than that. Although it is considered as composition, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the ball entrance at short intervals continuously, the upper limit of the number that can be stored is reached, and there is a problem that so-called overflow may occur. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to reduce the number of balls shot continuously, or to play while checking the number of stored information constantly, at the player's own discretion, which places a burden on the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the deceleration means, the deceleration means compares the flow-down speed of the first gaming ball which is entered first among the plurality of gaming balls. Then, the second game ball is decelerated at the detection entrance during the return period after the first game sphere enters the detection entrance after decelerating the second game sphere entering the entrance. Since entering the ball is prevented, the occurrence of an overflow can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the period from when the second gaming ball enters the deceleration means to when it enters the detection entrance is the time when the first gaming sphere enters the deceleration means and then enters the detection entrance Compared to the period up to at least the length of the period (return period) of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means, and in particular, the detection entrance is brought into the second state. It is desirable to extend the period of the longest dynamic display mode in the

  In addition, the deceleration of the game ball means to decrease the speed component along the path toward the detection entrance, for example, the game ball flows in the direction away from the detection entrance (negative speed Or decelerating means that prevent reciprocation temporarily (in case of zigzag movement) or reciprocate in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the detection entrance, or decelerating means having prevention means for temporarily preventing Until the prevention is released, the case where the gaming ball reciprocates in front of the preventing means, the case where the gaming ball temporarily stops, and the like are included.

  In addition, as a means to decelerate a game ball, the method of making the contact member which faces and contacts in the flow-down direction of a game ball overhang in a flow path, the method of making a magnetic force act on the game ball flowing down, a game ball Is exemplified by a method of arranging a sprocket in a passage through which the game player passes and rotating the sprocket on a game ball.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the deceleration means decelerates the gaming ball by intermittently applying a load in the opposite direction to the flowing direction to the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the deceleration means intermittently applies a load in the opposite direction to the flow direction to the gaming ball to reduce the number of rotations of the gaming ball, and as a result Since the game balls are decelerated, the game balls can be effectively decelerated.

  In the case of deceleration by friction with the wall, it is necessary to increase the contact area to improve the deceleration efficiency, but it is difficult to sufficiently increase the contact area if the target is a ball like a gaming ball It is. On the other hand, in the aspect in which the load is intermittently applied in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction, the speed of the deceleration does not match the shape of the target, so that the gaming ball can be effectively decelerated.

  In the gaming machine C2, the deceleration means is disposed to be able to move relative to the deceleration flow path guiding the entering game ball and to the deceleration flow path, and is configured to be able to apply a load to the gaming ball A moving means having an action portion, the moving means being capable of configuring a first state and a second state which is a state after relative movement from the first state to the decelerating flow path; The action portion is configured to apply a load to the gaming ball flowing down the deceleration flow passage in the second state, and the moving means is configured to move the first gaming ball through the deceleration flow passage. A gaming machine C3 that changes from a first state to the second state, and in the second state, the action unit applies a load to the second gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2, the moving means having the action part can configure the first state and the second state, and the moving means is the first gaming ball passing through the decelerating flow path Because the second gaming ball is given a load from the action part in the second state by the action of the second gaming ball, the second gaming ball can be decelerated without preparing a separate drive device, The space between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball can be separated.

  The action portion may be, for example, a rib portion extending in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the decelerating flow passage and extending in the decelerating flow passage, a magnet portion that exerts a magnetic force on the gaming ball, and the like. In the case where the action part is a rib part, an aspect in which the speed of the gaming ball is gradually decreased as an extension width to which the gaming ball can pass, an aspect in which the gaming ball is incapable of passing through and the gaming ball is stopped It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C3, the moving means is configured to increase the degree of deceleration of the second gaming ball as the number of balls entering the deceleration means increases within a predetermined period. A game machine C4 that features.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3, the action unit increases the degree of deceleration of the second gaming ball as the number of balls entering the deceleration means increases within a predetermined period, for example, Since the third gaming ball can be decelerated more than the second gaming ball when the number of balls flowing through the decelerating flow path becomes three within the period, the second gaming ball And the third game ball can be extended. As a result, even if the second game ball enters the detection entrance and the detection entrance is in the second state, the time until the third game entrance enters the ball. A period (return period) in which the dynamic display of 1 is executed can be earned, and the occurrence of an overflow due to the passage of the third gaming ball through the detection means can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the action part increases the deceleration degree of the second gaming ball, for example, an aspect in which the load acting on the second gaming ball increases, and a length (period) in which the load acts on the second gaming ball An example is exemplified in which the amount of work applied to the second gaming ball is increased by the expansion.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the deceleration means includes a miniaturization means configured to be movable relative to a flow path in which the gaming balls flow down, and the miniaturization means includes the first gaming ball. A game machine C5 characterized by moving in the direction of narrowing the inner circumferential shape of the flow path before the second game ball passes by passing through.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the miniaturization means causes the inner circumferential shape of the flow path before the second gaming ball passes by the passage of the first gaming ball. The movement in the narrowing direction can increase the resistance of the flow path when the second gaming ball passes. Thereby, the second gaming ball can be decelerated.

  In addition, by aligning the position where the inner circumferential shape of the flow path is narrowed with the position where the flow path changes direction (the position where the velocity component in the direction in which the game ball has flowed so far disappears) A large resistance can be applied at the timing of stopping along the direction in which the game ball was stopped, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from passing by force and to increase the action of decelerating the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a releasing means for releasing the deceleration effect generated on the second gaming ball by the decelerating means by a state change is provided, and the state change of the releasing means is a game having passed the decelerating means A game machine C6 characterized in that a ball passes through a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is provided with releasing means for releasing the decelerating effect, and the releasing by the releasing means that the gaming ball having passed the decelerating means passes through the predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for other drive means for changing the state of the release means.

  In the gaming machine C6, the releasing by the releasing means is performed by the gaming ball after passing through the detection entrance.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the release by the release means is performed by the gaming ball after passing through the detection entrance, so it is easy to manage the timing of the release by the release means It can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the deceleration means is configured in such a manner that the state changes between an initial state and a change state different from the initial state, and in the initial state, the gaming ball It is changed to the change state by passing it, and in the change state, the game ball is configured to change to the initial state by the game ball not passing through the deceleration means for a predetermined period, and the game ball passes the deceleration means A game machine C8 characterized in that a period during which the decelerating means passes through in the change state is set longer than a period in which the decelerating means passes through in the initial state.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing period of the gaming ball passing through the deceleration means is shortened when the deceleration means is in the initial state, and thereafter passes through the deceleration means As long as the intervals of the game balls are not longer than the predetermined period, the deceleration means can be constantly maintained in a changing state, and the period in which the game balls pass the deceleration means can be kept long.

  In the gaming machine C8, when the game ball enters the deceleration means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval while the deceleration means is in the change state, regardless of the number of game balls entered. A game machine C9 characterized in that the deceleration means throws a game ball at a constant interval longer than the predetermined interval.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C8, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the decelerating means when the decelerating means is in the changing state, it is constant regardless of the number of entering balls Since the game balls can be thrown at intervals, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of overflow at the detection entrance regardless of the number of balls entered.

  In addition, as the deceleration means, a sprocket-shaped device configured to be able to accommodate the gaming ball in the recess of the circumferential surface is exemplified.

<Big concept to delay the follow-up ball of continuous entry. Merge, branch, both include>
The game ball is a game area in which game balls are allowed to flow down, detection means capable of detecting passage of game balls of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the game area, the game area and the detection means And a switching means configured to be able to switch the flow path in which the gaming ball flows down in the connection flow path, the connection flow path including at least one flow path, A game machine D0 characterized in that the time required for the game ball to flow down the connection flow path changes depending on which flow path of the flow path which the connection flow path constitutes.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, a storage device capable of storing gaming balls is provided in one of the guiding paths provided with a plurality of guiding paths guided to the start winning hole, and the gaming balls are stored in the storage device The game ball reached when being guided is guided to the other guideway and then guided towards the starting winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, and the start winning is achieved There is a gaming machine which is induced to the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the discharge timing of the gaming balls stored in the storage device depends on the operation of the player, for example, as in the case where a plurality of gaming balls are induced to one guiding path. When the game ball is guided to another guidance route, it is not aware of it and the storage operation is released, and there is a risk that a plurality of game balls will be discharged in series toward the start winning opening There was a problem. In this case, it is necessary for the player to keep an eye on the flow-down mode of the plurality of game balls, so that the flow of the game balls will be felt hurriedly, and the player may be puzzled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D0, it is possible to switch the flow path in which the gaming ball flows down in the connection flow path, and the gaming ball is connected to the connection flow path depending on which flow path the connection flow path constitutes. Since the time required to flow down changes, the risk of the game balls being discharged continuously from the connection flow path can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D0, the detection means detects passage of at least a part of game balls flowing down the connection flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player upon detecting passage of the game balls. At least one, and the connection channel is different from at least a portion of a first channel connected to one of the detection means and the first channel, and And a second flow path connected to one of the plurality of flow paths, wherein the second flow path is a time required for the game ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detection means through the first flow path. In comparison, the gaming machine D1 is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the gaming ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detection means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0, even if a plurality of gaming balls are continuously entered from the gaming area to the connection channel, the detection means It is possible to provide a difference in the timing of entering the detection means between the gaming ball which has passed and the gaming ball which has flowed down the second flow path and has passed the detection means. That is, even when a plurality of gaming balls are connected in series and entered the connection flow path, the timing at which the entered gaming balls pass the detection means can be shifted.

  In addition, the aspect which lengthens a period is not limited at all. For example, the second flow channel may be formed to have a larger flow resistance compared to the first flow channel (difference in speed), or the second flow channel may be the first flow channel. It may be formed to be long along the flow-down direction of the gaming ball in comparison with (the difference due to the distance).

  In the gaming machine D1, the switching means is switched to a change state in which the game ball flows down the second flow path after the game ball flows down the first flow path, and then to the change state A game machine D2 characterized in that a maintained period is defined irrespective of the game balls flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, unlike the case of using the sorting members in alternate distribution, the gaming ball which flows down the second flow path during the period in which the switching means is maintained in the changed state. By defining independently, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second flow path continuously during this period. Thus, for example, when the ball entering the second channel sets a large benefit to the player as compared to the ball entering the first channel, the gaming ball continuously enters the second channel. This can enhance the player's interest.

  In the gaming machine D2, the switching means is characterized in that the maintenance of the change state is canceled by the gaming ball having passed through the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the maintenance of the change state of the switching means is released by the gaming ball having passed through the first flow path, so the gaming ball has passed through the first flow path By making the flow-down mode constant, it is possible to make constant the period for maintaining the switching means in the change state. In this way, it is possible to facilitate playing a game in which the aim is set so as to cause the game ball to enter the second flow path.

  Also, on the other hand, by making it possible to change the flow-down mode of the gaming ball having passed through the first flow path, it is possible to change the period in which the switching means is maintained in the changed state. As a result, since it is possible to prevent the period during which the game ball is allowed to enter the second flow path to always be the same, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the detection means includes a first detection port connected to the first flow path and a second detection port connected to the second flow path. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second detection port is set to increase the profit obtained by the player as compared to the first detection port. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the player's interest when continuous entry occurs. For example, while making it possible to acquire the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol by the game ball which has passed the first detection port, it is possible to acquire the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol by the game ball which has passed the second detection port. You may

  In this case, the distribution of the jackpot of the second special symbol can be set so that the benefit given to the player is higher than the distribution of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the player for the continuous entering ball can be set Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, as compared with the prize balls (for example, one piece) paid out when passing through the first detection port, the number of prize balls paid out when passing through the second detection port (for example, four) should be set. Thus, even if the special symbol does not become a jackpot, it is possible to increase the profit given to the player by continuous entering the ball, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  The present invention, in other words, includes one that enables the player to enter the second detection port by the game ball that is determined to finally pass through the first detection port. Thereby, for example, when it is possible to continuously enter the second detection port by game balls other than the game ball passing the first detection port (for example, the second detection port is capable of acquiring the second special symbol) As compared with the case where the detection opening of the normal symbol is arranged at the left part of the game area, the attention to the gaming ball passing through the first detection opening can be improved.

  In addition, the second detection port connected to the second flow path may be disposed as a detection port through which all the game balls entered in the second flow path pass, or the game in which the second flow path is input to the second flow path It may be arranged as a detection port through which part of the sphere passes. In this case, it may be defined how many of the gaming balls having entered the second flow pass the second detection port due to the pitch of the gaming balls into the connection flow path. In addition, even if the ball entry frequency of the gaming ball into the connection channel is the same, a movable device capable of changing the number of gaming balls passing through the second detection port may be disposed in the connection channel.

  In addition, even if a plurality of gaming balls flow continuously toward the detection means, if maintenance of the change state of the switching means is canceled by the gaming balls passing through the first detection port, The gaming ball can be made to flow toward the second detection port connected to the second flow path.

  Thereby, when the first detection port and the second detection port are start ports capable of acquiring the drawing of the variation of the same special symbol, it is easy to make a situation where the gaming ball passes the second detection port after the end of the variation. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D4, the connection flow path is provided with a passing port through which gaming balls can pass on the upstream side of the switching means, and the gaming ball having passed through the passing port is guided to the switching means, Among the gaming balls passed through and guided to the switching means, the gaming machine D5 capable of entering a gaming ball deviated from the first flow path into the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, since the gaming ball having passed the passage port of the connection flow path is guided to the switching means, the shooting ball is continuously aimed at the passage port It is possible to execute the state change of the switching means and the hitting of the gaming ball into the first flow path and the second flow path. Thereby, adjustment of the launch intensity of the gaming ball can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the second detection port is a detection port capable of acquiring a lottery different in type from the lottery obtainable by the gaming ball passing the first detection port.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least one gaming ball passes the first detection port before the gaming ball passes the second detection port, so that the first It is possible to prevent the game ball from having passed through the second detection port as a mark by using the notification relating to the lottery of the detection port as a mark.

  In addition, the combination of the kind of lottery which can be acquired when a game ball passes a 1st detection opening and a 2nd detection opening is not limited at all. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be differentiated, or the first special symbol and the ordinary symbol may be differentiated.

  In the gaming machine D6, the second detection port is a detection port capable of acquiring a lottery more advantageous than the lottery obtainable by the gaming ball passing through the first detection port.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connection channel simultaneously, after the gaming balls pass through the first detection port, the second Since the game ball can pass through the detection port, it is possible to compulsorily make a waiting time until the advantageous lottery variable display is started.

  In the gaming machine D6, the second detection port is configured to start an advantageous fluctuation due to the passage of the game ball beyond a fluctuation started due to the game ball passing the first detection port. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is a detection port capable of starting fluctuation in order to form a state in which gaming balls are easy to enter in the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the action of the gaming ball entering the connection channel can open and close the movable device at a position different from that of the connection channel. It is possible to create a gaming state in which the profit given to the player is large. In this case, in the gaming state where the profit given to the player is large, a notification is presented to prompt the mobile device in the open state to fire the gaming ball, so by playing the game accordingly, the first detection port The time which the fluctuation started which originates in having a game ball having passed can progress naturally.

<Concept for placing a stationary drive in the second flow path>
The game ball is a game area in which game balls are allowed to flow down, detection means capable of detecting passage of game balls of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the game area, the game area and the detection means The game ball is allowed to flow down through the inside of the connection flow path, including a connection flow path that allows flow-down and switching means configured to be able to switch the flow path in which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path. It comprises: two movable members which are changed in a first state to be restricted and a second state to allow the game ball to flow down, and a drive means for driving the movable members, wherein the detection means is While detecting the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connection flow path, at the same time as detecting the passage of the game balls, the predetermined benefit is provided to the player, and at least one is provided; At least one movable member Gaming machine E1, characterized in that disposed in can accommodate spacing one game ball.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, a storage device capable of storing gaming balls is provided in one of the guiding paths provided with a plurality of guiding paths guided to the start winning hole, and the gaming balls are stored in the storage device The game ball reached when being guided is guided to the other guideway and then guided towards the starting winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, and the start winning is achieved There is a gaming machine which is induced to the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the discharge timing of the gaming balls stored in the storage device depends on the operation of the player, so that, for example, while the gaming balls are being guided to another guiding path, There is a problem that there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls may be discharged at the same time toward the starting winning opening without knowing that the storage of the storage device is released.

  In this case, it is necessary for the player to keep an eye on the flow-down mode of the plurality of game balls, so that the flow of the game balls will be felt hurriedly, and the player may be puzzled. In addition, when the upper limit of the number of balls held for change in the starting winning opening is 0, even if a plurality of gaming balls enter the starting winning opening, a lottery by entering a part of the gaming balls There will only be opportunities, which may be detrimental to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one gaming ball can be accommodated between the two movable members which are driven by the driving means and which allow or restrict the flow-down of the gaming ball flowing down the connection flow path. Because the game balls can be held in the connecting channel while at least one of the movable members is in the first state, the connection flow is achieved by driving the two movable members. An interval can be provided at the timing when the game ball is discharged from the road.

  In the gaming machine E1, the two movable members include a first movable member, and a second movable member disposed on the downstream side of the connection flow path in comparison with the first movable member, The second movable member is driven so as to be capable of forming the first state when the gaming ball having passed through the first movable member in the second state reaches at least the second movable member. E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first movable member and the second movable member are disposed along the flow-down direction of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball having passed the first movable member is at least Since it is driven to be able to be formed in the first state when reaching the second movable member, it is possible to prevent the passing of the game ball (passing without being stopped). Therefore, for example, the arrangement of the gaming balls flowing down the connection flow path can be detected, and complicated control such as changing the movable member to the first state immediately before the gaming balls reach the movable member can be eliminated.

  In the gaming machine E2, a predetermined number of gaming balls entering the connection channel is defined after being restricted to flow down by the first movable member or restricted to flow by the second movable member. A game machine E3 comprising an upper limit passing means formed so that the game ball can pass when the ball is entered beyond the upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the number of gaming balls required to enter the connection channel for the upper limit passing means to pass the gaming ball is the state of the two movable members Therefore, the number of gaming balls that need to be entered into the second flow path in order to pass the gaming ball to the upper limit passing means can be changed optionally.

  In addition, when more game balls than the upper limit number enter into the connection channel, the game balls pass through the upper limit passing means and are discharged to another channel, so that too many game balls are connected It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging when entering the road.

  In the case where the game balls are stored starting from the second movable member (when the second movable member is restricted from flowing down), when the game balls are stored starting from the first movable member (flowing down to the first movable member And the upper limit number is increased by the number that can be accommodated between the first movable member and the second movable member.

  In addition, when the first movable member and the second movable member are both in the second state, the game balls are not stored, so the upper limit number is not defined (it becomes infinite).

  In the gaming machine E3, the detection means is provided with an upper limit passing port on which the gaming ball which has flowed down through the upper limit passing means is disposed so as to be able to pass, and the upper limit passing port is due to the passage of the gaming ball Fluctuation for forming a state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the advantageous detection port, which starts advantageous fluctuation due to the passage of the gaming ball beyond the fluctuation started due to the passage of the detection means A game machine E4 characterized in that it is configured as a detection port that can start.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the state where the gaming ball can pass to the advantage detection port is formed by passing the gaming ball through the upper limit passing port, so Can be motivated to enter the game ball continuously.

  In addition, switching the type of fluctuation started by the game ball entered into the connection flow path by the matter of changing whether or not to execute by the player's intention that many game balls enter the connection flow path Can. Therefore, as compared with the case where the detection port through which the game ball passes is switched by the order in which the game ball enters the connection flow path, and the type of the variation started is switched, the game ball is made to enter the connection flow path. It is possible to increase the proportion of the player's intention involved in the determination of the type of fluctuation initiated by the above.

  In the gaming machine E4, according to the state of the movable member, a dynamic upper limit number, which is a number that allows the game ball to pass through the upper limit passing port by entering a predetermined number of gaming balls in the connection flow path. A game machine E5 characterized by being settable.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4, the dynamic upper limit number can be set according to the state of the movable member (including the operating speed), so the state of the movable member during game is different Thus, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the connection flow passage through the upper limit passing port. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the gaming ball having entered the connection flow path.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the driving mode of the driving means is less likely to store the game balls than the first storage state in which the game balls can be stored in the two movable members and the first storage state. A game machine E6 characterized by being switchable from the second storage state.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the driving mode of the driving means is the first storage even if the number of gaming balls thrown to the second flow path is the same. Depending on whether it is the state or the second storage state, it is possible to form a state in which the game balls are easily stored by the two movable members and a state in which the game balls are difficult to store.

  As a result, in the case where the player plays a game in a state where the game ball is easily stored and in the case where a game is made in a state where the game ball is not easily stored, the player gains a profit even if the game ball is made to enter the connection channel similarly. Since the change is made, it is possible to allow the player to select in which state to play the game by displaying the change in the obtained profit on the display device.

  The first storage state includes a state in which all the balls reaching the two movable members are stored, and the second storage state does not store all the balls reaching the two movable members. It includes the state of passing it.

<One kind two kinds V (or V definite). Multiple entry balls V (in the beginning, the image of the flow path that can be covered)>
The game ball is a game area in which game balls are allowed to flow down, detection means capable of detecting passage of game balls of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the game area, the game area and the detection means And a switching means configured to be able to switch the flow path in which the gaming ball flows down in the connection flow path, wherein the detection means includes at least a portion flowing down the connection flow path. Detecting the passage of the game ball and giving a predetermined benefit to the player upon detection of the passage of the game ball, at least one being provided, the switching means being in the predetermined period Among the plurality of game balls entered in the connection channel, the following game balls entered after that are easier to pass through the detection means than the first game balls that are the game balls entered the first. Switching the connection channel in a manner that Game machine F1 to.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine capable of periodically changing the ratio of winning from the guiding path to the start winning opening, provided with a guiding path through which the gaming ball passing through the gate is guided to the starting winning opening. (See, for example, JP-A-2001-70526). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the ratio of winning from the induction route to the start winning opening does not change depending on the entering mode of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball tries to enter the induction route alone, but a plurality of gaming balls are There is no big change in the profit given to the player, though it tries to enter the guidance route collectively. Therefore, there was a problem that the effect of improving the attention power to the gaming ball entering the induction path was insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connection flow path within a predetermined period, compared to the first game ball entering the ball first, in the direction of the succeeding game ball entering after that Since the switching means acts so that it is easy to pass the detection means, the power of attention to the subsequent game balls can be improved, and the motivation for putting a plurality of game balls together in the connection flow path (motivation) As a result, the player can be prevented from making a single shot.

  In the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions by an action provided by the flow-down of the gaming ball having entered the connection flow path. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions by the action given by the flow-down of the gaming balls, and the subsequent gaming balls are more likely to pass the detecting means. There is no need to predict the flow time of the first game ball or the second game ball to control the operation of the electric movable device, and the operation control can be facilitated.

  In addition, the aspect which a switch means functions by the effect | action of a game ball is not specifically limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be an aspect in which the attitude of the switching means is changed by the collision of the game balls, or the aspect in which the switching means is driven due to the detection of the passage of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the connection flow path is different from at least a portion of a first flow path connected to the detection means and the first flow path, and is connected to one of the detection means. A second flow path, and the second flow path is compared to the time required for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path, compared to the game area To the detection means is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the game ball to flow down, and the switching means is the last game ball due to the first game ball flowing down the first flow path Changes to a state of passing through the second flow path. A game machine F3 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, even when a plurality of gaming balls collectively pass through the connection flow path, they can make an interval at which they can pass the detection means Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing down quickly, as in the case where a plurality of game balls pass the detection means almost simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to easily determine the game ball passing through the detection means, and it is possible to easily prevent the unexpected game ball from passing through the detection means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means is disposed on the upstream side of the detection means of the connection flow path, and controls the entry of the game ball into the detection means, the first state; And a discharge control means switchable in the second state for allowing the ball to enter the detection means, and the discharge control means is at least brought into the first state when the first game ball reaches, A game machine F4 characterized by being switchable in a mode in which the second state is made when the game ball reaches.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there may be a case where only the succeeding gaming ball can pass the detecting means, due to the state change of the discharge regulating means. Even after the first game ball has passed the detection means, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained. Therefore, the player's attention to the following game balls can be improved.

  In the embodiment in which the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball is forcibly opened, the discharge regulation means in the case of switching the difficulty of entering the ball to the first game ball and the second game ball detection means. The switching timing of the state change can be relaxed.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a mode by which discharge | emission to a detection means is made difficult by the discharge control means. For example, the game ball may be discharged to another discharge path other than the detection means, or the game ball may be temporarily stopped upstream of the discharge restriction means.

  The gaming machine F4 includes a ball entry restricting means capable of switching between a first state in which the game ball can enter the connection channel and a second state in which the game ball can not enter the connection channel. A game machine F5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4, the timing of entering the ball into the connection flow passage can be limited when the ball entry regulating means is in the first state. Can be made easy.

  In the gaming machine F5, the discharge restricting means is compared to the other cases when the first game ball can not pass through the detection means and the subsequent game ball can pass through the detection means. A game machine F6 characterized in that a period during which the ball entry restricting means is maintained in the first state is shortened.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, it is difficult to cause the gaming ball to enter the connection flow path within a predetermined period in a situation where the succeeding gaming ball can pass the detection means. Can.

  In this way, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that it is possible to pass the detection means if it is a succeeding game ball, so that the player is frequently made to appeal the self-powered game to the player. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the switching means is provided with decelerating means for decelerating the gaming ball flowing down the connection flow path, and the degree of deceleration by the decelerating means is switched with the first game ball or the succeeding game ball A game machine F7 characterized in that it is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the first game ball and the second game ball can be decelerated by the deceleration means, and the degree of the deceleration can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the connecting flow path as compared with the case where the arrangement of the first game ball and the second game ball is defined only by the shape of the flow down path where the first game ball and the second game ball flow. it can.

  In the gaming machine F7, the action of deceleration by the deceleration means is characterized in that the action given to the subsequent game ball is smaller than the action given to the first game ball. .

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the degree of deceleration given to the following gaming ball by the deceleration means is suppressed, so the flow-down mode of the following gaming ball becomes jerky or stops halfway Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the flow-down mode of the subsequent game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the switching means is formed to be capable of preventing passage of gaming balls of the detection means within a predetermined period, and at the beginning of the predetermined period, the succeeding gaming ball is the connection passage. A game machine F9 characterized by being set regardless of the time of entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, it is possible to set the start time of the predetermined period without being involved in the timing when the following gaming ball enters the connection channel.

  That is, when a movable member capable of switching whether or not to enter the game ball is disposed at the entrance of the connection flow path, the movable member is not involved in the passing timing of the following game ball, and the start of the predetermined period is set. can do.

  In addition, the setting reference | standard of the start of a predetermined period is not specifically limited. For example, it may be set according to the flow-down mode of the first game ball, or may be set on the basis of the opening timing of the movable mechanism that opens and closes the inlet of the connection channel.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F2 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, F1 to F10, the gaming machine is characterized in that a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are merged. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine capable of periodically changing the rate of winning from the induction track to the start winning hole (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-70526).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement with regard to the attentional power of the gaming ball entering the guiding path. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the power of attention to a gaming ball entering a guidance path. Do.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 can detect passage of at least a part of game balls from the game area where the game balls are allowed to flow down and at least a part of the game balls which flowed down the game area. A detection means, a connection flow path for connecting the game area and the detection means so that the game ball can flow down, and a switching means which can switch the flow path in which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path The detection means detects passage of at least a part of game balls flowing down the connection flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player upon detecting the passage of the game balls. One of the plurality of game balls, which is one of the plurality of game balls entered into the connection flow path within a predetermined period, is later entered than the first game ball which is the game ball entered first. The succeeding game ball which has passed the ball passes the detection means Switching said connection channel in a manner to facilitate.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the connection passage is different at least in part from a first passage connected to the detection means and the first passage. And a second flow path connected to one of the detection means, and the second flow path is for the game ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detection means through the first flow path It is constituted as a flow path which requires a long period for a game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means as compared to the time required for the game, and in the switching means, the first game ball is the first flow path Due to flowing down, the subsequent gaming ball changes to a state of passing through the second flow path.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the switching means is disposed on the upstream side of the detection means of the connection flow path, and the game ball is detected to the detection means. The game machine further comprises an emission restricting means that can be switched between a first state for restricting ball entry and a second state for permitting ball entry into the detection means of the game ball. Is made to be in the first state, and can be switched in a mode in which the second state is made when the following gaming ball is reached.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to make the power of attention to the gaming ball entering the guiding path good.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the attention of each of the first and second game balls.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to combine the switching mode of the emission control means and the flow-down mode of the gaming ball. It can improve the attention to the ball.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (part of the game area)
64 winning opening (part of detection entrance, part of passing opening)
87 Warp passage (part of passage)
300, 2300 delay device (delay means)
311 1st groove (part of decelerating flow path)
312 second groove (part of the first guide channel)
312d Detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entrance, first detection port)
312e Side wall (part of connection channel, part of first channel)
313 3rd groove (part of 2nd guide channel)
321 Slide moving member (moving means, miniaturization means)
321a1 Convex part (action part)
340, 2340 distribution device (distribution means)
341, 2341 first wall (first wall)
342 second wall (second wall)
342a Tip convex part (part of dividing means)
350 Second adjustment device (biasing means)
400 delay floor device (rolling means)
410 Fan-like member (first floor member, part of prevention means, part of throwing means, middle floor member)
411a chamfer (optimum drop)
436 Delay channel (part of throwing means)
800 V winning device (part of the ball entry control means)
3340 Stop device (part of deceleration means, part of switching means)
3360 Maintenance device (releasing means, part of speed reducing means)
3363 Contact part (part of speed reduction means)
4340 Sprocket (part of the reduction means)
5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310 Body member (part of connection flow path)
5311 First groove (part of connection channel, part of first channel, part of second channel)
5312 Second groove (part of connection channel, part of first channel, part of second channel)
5314, 6314, 7314 Continuous passage groove (part of connection channel, part of second channel)
5314a1 Upper limit discharge hole (upper limit passing means)
5314c Second detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entrance)
5314e Third detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entrance, second detection port, upper limit passage port)
5510 Movable plate part (movable member)
5512 Upper extension plate (first movable member)
5513 Lower extension plate (second movable member)
5520, 6520 Drive device (part of drive means)
6510 Movable plate part (movable member)
6511 Upper movable plate (first movable member)
6512 Lower movable plate (second movable member)
8313, 9313 Slanted channels (part of connecting channel, part of first channel, part of second channel)
8314 Branch delay groove (part of connection channel, part of second channel)
8315d V winning switch (detection means, detection entrance)
8511 Upper movable plate (part of discharge control means)
8512 Lower movable plate (part of discharge control means)
P1, P4, P6, P21, P31, P41 Ball (1st game ball)
P2, P5, P7, P22, P32, P42 Ball (second game ball)
P11, P12 balls (game balls, other game balls)
P81, P91 Game ball (the first game ball)
P82, P92 game ball (following game ball)

Claims (2)

A game area in which game balls are formed so as to flow down;
Detection means capable of detecting passage of at least a part of the gaming balls having flowed down the gaming area;
A connecting channel connecting the game area and the detection means so that the game ball can flow down;
And a switching unit configured to be able to switch the channel through which the gaming ball flows down in the connection channel,
The detecting device, the connecting channel to detect at least a passage of a portion of the game ball flowing down, a shall Let it gives a predetermined benefit to the player with the detecting the passage of the game ball, at least One equipped,
It said switching means, among a plurality of game balls flowing into the connecting channel within a predetermined period, than the first game ball is a game ball entering the previously found the following second game ball entering thereafter Switching the connection channel in a manner to facilitate passage of the predetermined detection means ,
The switching means is disposed upstream of the predetermined detection means of the connection flow path, and is capable of restricting the first gaming ball from entering the predetermined detection means, and a second state of the second game A discharge restricting means capable of switching the ball into the predetermined detecting means in an acceptable second state;
And the predetermined detection means is restricted the incoming balls in the first state, wherein in The predetermined detection means is allowed to enter the sphere a second state, and wherein said same detector der Rukoto Gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a substrate box .

Images